IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﺎر‬
FOREWORD
The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the
views of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum and are
intended for use in the oil and gas production
facilities,
oil
refineries,
chemical
and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing
installations and other such facilities.
IPS is based on internationally acceptable
standards and includes selections from the items
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are
also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience
acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and the
local market availability. The options which are
not specified in the text of the standards are
itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select
his appropriate preferences therein.
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be
sufficiently flexible so that the users can adapt
these standards to their requirements. However,
they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS
Standard shall be prepared by the user which
elaborates the particular requirements of the user.
This addendum together with the relevant IPS
shall form the job specification for the specific
project or work.
The IPS is reviewed and up-dated approximately
every five years. Each standards are subject to
amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the
latest edition of IPS shall be applicable
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send
their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the
following address. These comments and
recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant
technical committee and in case of approval will
be incorporated in the next revision of the
standard.
Standards
and
Research
No.19, Street14, North kheradmand
Department
Karimkhan Avenue, Tehran, Iran .
Postal Code- 1585886851
Tel: 021- 88810459-60 & 021- 66153055
Fax: 021- 88810462
Email: Standards@nioc.org
‫( ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دﻳﺪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎي‬IPS) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻔﺖ‬
،‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬،‫ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬،‫و ﮔﺎز‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﻓﺮاورش ﮔﺎز و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﺑﻴﻦاﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﺪهﻫﺎﺋﻲ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺟﻊ در ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻧﻔﺖ ﻛﺸﻮر و‬.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮاردي‬،‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻻ از ﺑﺎزار داﺧﻠﻲ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎز‬
.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ اﺻﻼﺣﻲ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي از ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ آورده ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻧﻌﻄﺎف ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺪوﻳﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪيﻫﺎي ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص آﻧﻬﺎ‬.‫ﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ‬.‫را ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ آن ﭘﺮوژه و ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺧﺎص را‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داد‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻫﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و روزآﻣﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردي ﺣﺬف و ﻳﺎ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﺑﻪ آن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻮاره آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎ و‬،‫از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات اﺻﻼﺣﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻟﺤﺎﻗﻴﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد‬
‫ ﻧﻈﺮات و‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ زﻳﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺧﺎص ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮدهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدات درﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ در ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و در‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ در ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﻌﺪي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻮﭼﻪ‬،‫ ﺧﺮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬،‫ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻛﺮﻳﻤﺨﺎن زﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻬﺮان‬،‫اﻳﺮان‬
19 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬،‫ﭼﻬﺎردﻫﻢ‬
‫اداره ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎت و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ‬
1585886851 : ‫ﻛﺪﭘﺴﺘﻲ‬
021-66153055 ‫ و‬021-888104590 – 60 : ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
88810462 : ‫دور ﻧﮕﺎر‬
Standards@nioc.org
:‫آدرس اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
GENERAL DEFINITIONS:
Throughout this Standard the following definitions
shall apply.
COMPANY :
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated
companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
such as National Iranian Oil Company, National
Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical
Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And
Distribution Company.
PURCHASER :
Means the "Company" where this standard is a
part of direct purchaser order by the "Company",
and the "Contractor" where this Standard is a part
of contract documents.
VENDOR AND SUPPLIER:
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or
fabricate the equipment or material.
CONTRACTOR:
: ‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
.‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬
: ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮﻛﺖﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ‬،‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﮔﺎز اﻳﺮان‬،‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ و ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ و ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺮآوردهﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻧﻔﺘﻲ اﺗﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ "ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ" ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ آن "ﺷﺮﻛﺖ" ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ "ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري" ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺪارك ﻗﺮار داد آن اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه و ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﻟﺰوم ﺻﻨﻌﺖ را ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎر‬
Refers to the persons, firm or company whose
tender has been accepted by the company.
‫ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدش‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺼﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
EXECUTOR :
: ‫ﻣﺠﺮي‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮي ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ اﺗﻼق ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ و ﻳﺎ راه اﻧﺪازي ﭘﺮوژه را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
Executor is the party which carries out all or part of
construction and/or commissioning for the project.
INSPECTOR :
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a
person/persons or a body appointed in writing by
the company for the inspection of fabrication and
installation work
SHALL:
Is used where a provision is mandatory.
SHOULD:
Is used where a provision is advisory only.
WILL:
Is normally used in connection with the action by
the "Company" rather than by a contractor,
supplier or vendor.
MAY:
Is used where a provision is completely discretionary.
:‫ﺑﺎزرس‬
‫ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪاي اﺗﻼق‬/‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎزرس ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺟﺒﺎري اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮورت اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
: ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲرود‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم آن اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
0
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD
FOR
CONTROL PANELS AND SYSTEM CABINETS
ORIGINAL EDITION
FIRST REVISION
APRIL 2010
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻛﺎﻻ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اول‬
1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of
Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither
whole nor any part of this document maybe disclosed to any
third party, reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺣﻘﻮق آن ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ آن ﺑﻮده و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ وزارت ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬
،‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬،‫ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ازﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬،‫از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻳﺎ روش دﻳﮕﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻓﺮاد ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
CONTENTS:
Page
No
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
:‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
1. SCOPE ............................................................... 4
4 ...................................................... ‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
2. REFERENCES .................................................. 4
4 ............................................................. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
3. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS .............. 6
6 ............................................... ‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-3
4. UNITS................................................................. 6
6 ............................................................ ‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-4
5. GENERAL ......................................................... 6
6 ............................................................. ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬-5
6. LABELING AND NAMEPLATES ................. 9
9 ............................ ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ زﻧﻲ و ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬-6
7. CONTROL PANELS ........................................ 10
10 ................................................. ‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-7
8. CONSOLE TYPE PANELS ............................. 11
11 .............................................. ‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻟﻲ‬-8
9. INSTRUMENT PANELS - MIMIC PROCESS
FLOW DIAGRAMS ......................................... 11
‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬-‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬-9
11 ............................................... ‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ‬
10. PAINTING OF INSTRUMENTS AND
PANELS ........................................................... 13
13 .............. ‫ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬-10
11. PANEL CONSTRUCTION............................ 14
14 .................................................... ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬-11
12. ENCLOSED PANELS FOR HAZARDOUS
AND NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
CLASSIFICATIONS OUTDOOR & INDOOR
LOCATIONS.................................................... 15
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺼﻮر ﺷﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬-12
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ و ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮدر داﺧﻞ و ﺑﻴﺮون‬
15 ......................................................... ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
13. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION................. 15
15 ................................................ ‫ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬-13
14. AIR SUPPLY TO PNEUMATIC PANELS .. 18
18 .......... (‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ)ﺑﺎدي‬-14
15. SYSTEM CABINET ARRANGEMENT
(ELECTRONIC AUXILIARY
ENCLOSURES)................................................. 20
‫آراﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ )ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎي‬-15
20 ............................................. (‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
15.1 General ....................................................... 20
20 ...................................................... ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-15
1
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
15.2 The Enclosure ............................................ 21
21 ......................................................‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬2-15
15.3 The Circuitry.............................................. 24
24 .................................................. ‫ ﻣﺪارﺑﻨﺪي‬3-15
15.4 Card Frames .............................................. 25
25 ................................ ‫ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬4-15
15.5 Internal Wiring .......................................... 26
26 ........................................ ‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ‬5-15
15.6 Wiring Techniques .................................... 28
28 .................................... ‫ روش ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ‬6-15
15.7 Earthing...................................................... 29
29 ............................................... ‫ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬7-15
15.8 Instrument Electrical Supply .................... 30
30 ............................‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬8-15
15.9 Identification .............................................. 33
33 ................................................... ‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ‬9-15
16. ERGONOMIC CONSIDERATION............. 33
33‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬-16
17. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE .......................... 34
34 ................................................ ‫ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬-17
17.1 Burn-in Period ........................................... 34
34 ................................................ ‫ دوره روﺷﻦ‬1-17
17.2 Reliability ................................................... 35
35 ............................................ ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد‬2-17
17.3 Type Test .................................................... 36
36 .............................................. ‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻧﻮﻋﻲ‬3-17
18. FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING . 38
38..................................... ‫ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪاي‬-18
19. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION.. 39
39 .....................................‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي و ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬-19
20. GUARANTEE................................................... 40
40 ...........................................................‫ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬-20
21. PURCHASING PROCEDURES.................... 41
41 .......................................‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬-21
21.1 Extent of Supply......................................... 41
41 ..................................... ‫ اداﻣﻪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﺟﻨﺎس‬1-21
21.2 Quotation.................................................... 41
41 ............................................. ‫ ﺑﺮگ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد‬2-21
21.3 Documentation ........................................... 43
43............................................................... ‫ ﻣﺪارك‬3-21
21.4 Time Schedule ............................................ 45
45 ......................................... ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎنﺑﻨﺪي‬4-21
2
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
APPENDICES:
:‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A ..................................................... 46
46.................................................................. ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
3
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬-1
1. SCOPE
‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﻻ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﮔﺎز و‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻔﺖ‬
.‫ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
This standard covers the general requirements for
the material of control panels and system cabinets
to be used in oil, gas, and petrochemical
industries.
:1 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 1:
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬1386 ‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و روز آﻣﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﻣﻮارد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان‬
.‫ اﺑﻼغ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‬312 ‫ ﻃﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬1 ‫اﺻﻼﺣﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬
This standard specification is reviewed and
updated by the relevant technical committee on
April. 2007, as amendment No. 1 by circular No.
312.
:2 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 2:
‫ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺎزﻧﮕﺮي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻓﻮق‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد دو زﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬1389 ‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ ﻣﺎه ﺳﺎل‬
‫ از اﻳﻦ‬.‫( اراﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬1) ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
.‫( اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻨﺴﻮخ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0) ‫ﭘﺲ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬
This bilingual standard is a revised version of the
standard specification by the relevant technical
committee on April 2010, which is issued as
revision (1). Revision (0) of the said standard
specification is withdrawn.
:3 ‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note 3:
‫ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ و اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﻼك ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
In case of conflict between Farsi and English
languages, English language shall govern.
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬-2
2. REFERENCES
‫در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ آﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار و‬
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪي ﻛﻪ در‬،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ زﻳﺮ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از اﻳﻦ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪاﻧﺪ‬
‫ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ دار‬.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻼك ﺑﻮده و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ در‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫آﻧﻬﺎ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ در ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬.‫اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﻀﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎي آن ﻣﻼك ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Throughout this standard the following dated and
undated standards/codes are referred to. These
referenced documents shall, to the extent
specified herein, form a part of this standard. For
dated references, the edition cited applies. The
applicability of changes in dated references that
occur after the cited date shall be mutually agreed
upon by the Company and the Vendor. For
undated references, the latest edition of the
referenced
documents
(including
any
supplements and amendments) applies.
(‫)ﻛﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮن ﺑﻴﻦاﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ‬
IEC
(INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION)
IEC 60068
Part 2
"Environmental
Procedures"
"‫"دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
Testing
"‫"آزﻣﻮن ﻫﺎ‬
"Tests"
IEC
IEC 60068
2 ‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬
: A ‫ آزﻣﻮن‬IEC 60068-2-1
"‫"ﺳﺮد‬
: B ‫ آزﻣﻮن‬IEC 60068-2-2
"‫"ﺣﺮارت ﺧﺸﻚ‬
: Kc ‫ آزﻣﻮن‬IEC 60068-2-4
‫" آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي دياﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﺑﺮاي‬
"‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
IEC 60068-2-1 Test A:
"Cold"
IEC 60068-2-2 Test B
"Dry Heat"
IEC 60068-2-42 Test Kc:
"Sulfur Dioxide Tests for
Contacts and Connections"
4
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
: Ca ‫ آزﻣﻮن‬IEC 60068-2-78
"‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﺎر‬،‫"ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺮﻃﻮب‬
IEC 60068-2-78 Test Ca:
"Damp Heat , Steady State"
IEC 60079
Part 11
"Electrical Apparatus for
Explosive Gas Atmosphere"
‫"وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي‬
"‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺎز ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬
"Intrinsically Safe (i)"
"‫"ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫"درﺟﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
" (IP ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎ )ﻛﺪ‬
IEC 60529
"Classification of Degrees of
Protection
Provided
by
Enclosures (IP Code)"
IEC 60605
"Equipment
Testing"
IEC 60641
"Specification for Pressboard
and Presspaper for Electrical
Purposes"
"Industrial
Measurement
Equipment" Conditions
‫"ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻓﺸﺮده و‬
"‫ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺼﺎرف ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
IEC 60641
IEC 60654
"‫ "ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ آب و ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ‬-1 ‫ ﺑﺨﺶ‬IEC 60654
"‫ "اﺛﺮات ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬-3 ‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬IEC 60654
IEC 60654 Part 3 “Mechanical Influences"
"‫ "اﺛﺮات ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ وﺧﻮردﮔﻲ‬-4 ‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬IEC 60654
Erosive
IEC 61000
"Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61000-4-3
"Testing and Measurement
TechniquesRadiated,
Radio-Frequency,
Electromagnetic
Field
Immunity Test"
ISA
(INSTRUMENT
AMERICA)
IEC 60529
IEC 60605
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫"ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي‬
"‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬-"‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
Process
and Control
Operating
and
11 ‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬
"‫ "ﺗﻌﺎرﻳﻒ و اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬-1 ‫ ﺑﺨﺶ‬IEC 60641
General
IEC 60654 Part 1 "Climatic Conditions"
IEC 60654 Part 4 "Corrosive
Influences"
IEC 60079
‫"آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬
"‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
Reliability
IEC 60641Part 1 "Definitions and
Requirements"
IEC 60654
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
SOCIETY
"‫"ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
IEC 61000
‫"آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و روش ﻓﻨﻲ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪان‬
‫ﻣﺼﻮﻧﻴﺖ‬
‫آزﻣﻮن‬
‫ﭘﺮﺗﻮاﻓﻜﻨﻲ‬
،‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
"‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ رادﻳﻮﺋﻲ‬
IEC 61000-4-3
(‫ )اﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﻮن‬ISA
OF
"‫ "آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬ANSI/ISA S 71-04
ANSI/ISA S 71-04 "Environmental Testing"
(‫ )اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ اﻳﺮان‬IPS
IPS (IRANIAN PETROLEUM STANDARDS)
IPS-I-IN-100(1)
"Inspection Standard for
General Instrument Systems"
‫ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
"‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
IPS-I-IN-100(1)
IPS-M-IN-120
"Material and Equipment
Standard for Temperature
Instruments”
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻛﺎﻻ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮاي‬
"‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ دﻣﺎ‬
IPS-M-IN-120
5
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-E-IN-180
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮق ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
"‫ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬
‫"اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي‬
"‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬
“Engineering
Standard
for
Instruments Electrical Power
Supply & Distribution System"
IPS-E-IN-180
IPS-E-IN-190
IPS-E-IN-190 "Engineering Standard
Transmission Systems"
for
IPS-G-IN-200 "General
Standard
Instrument Air System"
for
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻮاي‬IPS-G-IN-200
"‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
IPS-G-IN-220 "Engineering and Installation
Standard for Control Centers”
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮاي‬IPS-G-IN-220
"‫ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
IPS-E-GN-100 "Engineering
Units"
Standards
"‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬IPS-E-GN-100
for
"‫ "ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬IPS-D-IN-116
IPS-D-IN-116 "Standard Drawings"
‫ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت در اﺳﻨﺎد‬-3
3. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
‫در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد اﺧﺘﻼف و ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ در اﺳﻨﺎد و ﻣﺪارك ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
‫ اﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺪارك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ )ﻫﺮ‬،‫اﺳﺘﻌﻼم ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
:‫ﻛﺪام ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ دﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ( ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات داده ﺷﺪه در آﻧﻬﺎ‬:‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ اول‬.‫ داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬:‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دوم‬.‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬:‫ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻮم‬‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮت ﻫﺎ در اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ارﺟﺎع‬
،‫ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬.‫داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺪارك ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ را ﺻﺎدر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
In the case of conflict between documents
relating to the inquiry or order, the following
priority of documents shall apply:
- First Priority: Purchase order and variations
thereto.
- Second Priority: Data sheets and drawings.
- Third Priority: This Standard.
All conflicting requirements shall be referred to the
Purchaser in writing. The Purchaser will issue
confirmation document if needed for clarification.
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬-4
4. UNITS
‫ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬،(SI) ‫ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬،‫اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در ﻣﺘﻦ‬،‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-E-GN-100 ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ دﻳﮕﺮي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
This standard is based on International System of
Units (SI), as per IPS-E-GN-100 except where
otherwise specified.
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬-5
5. GENERAL
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت واﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‬1-5
5.1 Each panel section shall be constructed as a
self-contained unit so that after testing at the
manufacturers’ works, the least number of
connections are disturbed when the panel is
sectioned for shipment to site. Design details,
layout and shape of panels shall be discussed and
agreed with the Purchaser before drawings are
submitted.
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ و‬،‫ﭘﺲ از آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺪاد‬،‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﺋﻲ و ﺷﻜﻞ‬،‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬.‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺬاﻛﺮه‬،‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ اراﺋﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫و ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪي‬2-5
5.2 The panel layout shall be designed to follow
the actual physical arrangement of the unit as
closely as possible:
:‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ واﺣﺪ در ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻬﻢ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
a) Instruments shall be mounted in logical
groupings according to their position in the
process units, i.e., instruments needed for the
area of control exercised by process operators
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﮔﺮوه ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ در واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
6
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
shall be grouped together. A clear
demarcation shall be made on the panel
between process units. Each unit shall be
identified by a nameplate mounted in the top
section of the panel.
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮوه ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري واﺿﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ واﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬.‫روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻛﻪ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
b) As a secondary criterion instruments shall
occupy relative positions in accordance with
the natural expectations of the operator, i.e.,
related variables shall be adjacent, (e.g.
cascade controllers). Expected sequences as of
process items or of position within a process
item, should be adjacent.
‫ب( ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎي ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎرات ﻣﻌﻤﻮل اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را‬
‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬،‫ﺑﺮآورده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
.(‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻗﻼم ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻳﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬
‫ج( ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎي دﻣﺎي ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪاي ﻧﺼﺐ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
c) Panel mounted multipoint temperature
indicators shall be mounted on a vertical
section of the main panel.
.‫در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
5.3 An identification system, such as tag numbers,
color codes or symbols, which will enable an
operator to quickly identify any particular
equipment, shall be used in the mimic panel layout.
‫ ﻛﺪﻫﺎي رﻧﮓ‬،‫ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎي ﭘﻼك‬،‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ‬3-5
5.4 The space behind and at each end of a freestanding panel assembly shall form an
unobstructed passageway of 1500 mm taking into
account any equipment mounted on the back wall.
Similarly the walkway inside a walk-through type
of panel shall be not less than 1200 mm.
‫ ﻓﻀﺎي ﭘﺸﺖ و ﻫﺮ دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ‬4-5
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات وﻳﮋه را‬،‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ راﻫﺮو ﺑﺪون ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬1500 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻋﺮض‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﺤﻮ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در دﻳﻮار ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬1200 ‫راﻫﺮوي داﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي راﻫﺮو دار ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻋﺮض‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
5.5 The instrument arrangement and mounting
heights on the panel shall be subject to the
Purchaser approval
‫ آراﻳﺶ و ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬5-5
5.6 In general the maximum and minimum
instrument mounting heights shall be as follows:
‫ ﺑﻄﻮرﻛﻠﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬6-5
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
:‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) Minimum: To centerline of instruments
requiring operation or manipulation (e.g.,
pushbuttons or controllers) 685 mm.
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ وﺳﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ‬:‫اﻟﻒ( ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
b) Maximum: To centerline of instruments
requiring operation or manipulation (e.g.,
pushbuttons or controllers) 1600 mm.
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ وﺳﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬:‫ب( ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ دﮔﻤﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﺸﺎري ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻜﺎري )ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬685 (‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ دﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺸﺎري ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬،‫ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻜﺎري )ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1600 (‫ﻫﺎ‬
c) Maximum: To centerline of instruments
requiring inspection but not operation in
normal use (i.e., Receiver gages) 1980 mm.
‫ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ وﺳﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬:‫ج( ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
(‫ ﺳﻨﺠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه‬،‫اﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد در اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻋﺎدي )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1980
‫ اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬7-5
5.7 Items such as annunciators may be mounted
above other instruments, but care must be taken
that legends on annunciators are clearly readable
in spite of their mounting height. In any case test
acknowledgment buttons for annunciators are
subject to the same mounting height rules as for
‫ اﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ روي‬،‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪاردﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ رﻏﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺼﺐ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ در ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎل دﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي آزﻣﻮن ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺸﺪار‬.‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
7
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
instruments requiring
normal plant operation.
manipulation
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
during
‫ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ارﺗﻔﺎع‬،‫دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎ در ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ واﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻜﺎري ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
.‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
5.8 Panels should normally be free standing and
console type may be used with prior consent of
the user. In all cases they shall conform to the
purchaser standard drawings.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﺑﻮده و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ از ﻧﻮع ﻛﻨﺴﻮل‬8-5
5.9 The control panel shall be facial type with
miniature or large case instruments, or both,
mounted in horizontal and vertical rows.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﺻﻔﺤﻪاي ﺑﺎ اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ در اﻧﺪازه‬9-5
5.10 The distance between rows of instruments
will depend upon the types of instrument and the
accessibility for maintenance and adjustment. See
IPS-G-IN-220(1), Fig. 3.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ردﻳﻒﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع‬10-5
‫ در‬.‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺣﺎﻻت آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ در ردﻳﻒ ﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ دو ﺑﻮده‬،‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰرگ‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬.‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دارد‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬IPS-G-IN-220(1) ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬-3 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺸﺪاردﻫﻨﺪه و‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغﻫﺎي ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻜﻲ‬11-5
5.11 The individual indicating lights, annunciator
systems and miscellaneous indicators shall be
mounted above the top row of the instruments
and shall conform to the purchaser standard
drawings:
‫ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ردﻳﻒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
:‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) The alarm indicators shall be located in the
panel section containing the associated
instrumentation. They shall be mounted above
the process instruments in a matrix array, but
no single array should exceed seven indicators
in any horizontal row or five indicators in any
vertical row.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬.‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي در آراﻳﺶ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺴﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه در ﻫﺮ‬7 ‫ اﻣﺎ آراﻳﺶ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه در ردﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺗﺠﺎوز‬5 ‫ردﻳﻒ اﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
b) Indicating lights not associated with
process alarms shall be segregated from
process alarms.
‫ب( ﭼﺮاغﻫﺎي ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺸﺪارﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻫﺸﺪارﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﺟﺪا ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ )ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ( ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬12-5
5.12 Mimic presentation (semi graphic) of the
main process flow diagrams is acceptable, but
full graphic presentation is not recommended.
.‫ اﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
Where a graphic display is required, the execution
may be such that the layout can be easily modified
on the site, i.e. by means of small removable and
replaceable building blocks. The detailed execution
shall be as indicated in the requisition and the
drawings attached or referred there to.
‫ اﺟﺮاء ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﺋﻲ را در ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ اﺻﻼح‬
‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ و‬،‫ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﺟﺮاء ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ رﺟﻮع داده ﺷﺪه‬
5.13 The total width of the panel shall be
determined by the type and number of
instruments used. Groups of panels shall present
a smooth unbroken surface.
‫ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮع و ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬13-5
5.14 On new process plant installations, at least
20% usable spare panel space shall be provided.
20 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬،‫ در ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬14-5
‫ ﮔﺮوه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ‬.‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫راﺳﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
8
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
This spare space should normally be distributed
over the panel. In some cases it may be logical to
provide spare blank panel space at the end of the
group of panels.
.‫درﺻﺪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺣﺎﻻت‬.‫ﻓﻀﺎي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬
.‫در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﮔﺮوه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
5.15 Free space shall be available, at the back of
the spare blank panel for future expansion.
‫ ﻓﻀﺎي آزاد در ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ‬15-5
5.16 Auxiliary equipment installed in prewired
and pre piped panels shall be accessible for
maintenance and adjustments.
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ‬16-5
5.17 All wiring, piping, etc. shall be adequately
marked, coded or colored so that it can be easily
identified.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬،‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬17-5
5.18 All instruments on the face of the control
panel shall be flush-mounted.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ در روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ‬18-5
5.19 ESD switches shall be guarded from
accidental operation.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻊ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬19-5
5.20 Illumination levels on control panels, and
desks, shall be in accordance with electrical part
of IPS standards IPS-E-EL-100 "Lighting and
Wiring". Adequate illumination shall be provided
at the rear of the panel. See also: IPS-G-IN-220(1),
paragraph 6.2.3.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺨﺶ‬،‫ ﺳﻄﻮح روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬20-5
5.21 Panels that are totally enclosed shall have
access doors with quick release fastenings.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﺑﺪون ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ درب‬21-5
5.22 The panel assemblies shall be tested before
erection wherever possible.
‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن دارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ‬22-5
5.23 Console type panels will normally be free
standing cabinet type enclosures, incorporating a
desk or sloping area on the front of the cabinets.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي از ﻧﻮع ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬23-5
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و‬،‫ﻛﺸﻲ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻳﺎ رﻧﮓ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮان‬،‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري‬
.‫آن را ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ داد‬
.‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
IPS-E-EL-100 ‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،IPS ‫ﺑﺮق اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
‫ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻋﻘﺐ‬.‫"روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ" ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬3-2-6 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ‬.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬IPS-G-IN-220(1)
.‫ﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻔﺖ و ﺑﺴﺖ آزادﺳﺎزي ﺳﺮﻳﻊ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺐ دار در ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
5.24 Instruments on consoles shall be prewired
and pre piped and shall be completely enclosed.
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ روي ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ‬24-5
5.25 If maximum ambient temperature conditions
are such that apparatus manufacturer’s
recommended operating temperatures could be
exceeded, provisions for environmental control
shall be agreed with the purchaser.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻃﻮرﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ از‬25-5
.‫ﻛﺸﻲ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﻟﻮازم ﺗﺠﺎوز‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪاﺗﻲ ﺗﻮاﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬،‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻌﻤﻞ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ زﻧﻲ و ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬-6
6. LABELING AND NAMEPLATES
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ و وﻇﺎﻳﻒ اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬1-6
6.1 Panels shall be clearly labeled with plant
instrument numbers and duties at the front and
rear.
.‫واﺣﺪ در ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ زده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
9
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
6.2 Labels shall be transparent plastic material
and engraved on reverse side. The engraving to
be filled in either black or white depending on
which is most legible. Provision shall be made in
the panel mounted instruments, for insertion and
removal of meter constant cards and control
valve action.
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺷﻔﺎف ﺑﻮده و ﺳﻤﺖ‬2-6
6.3 The material for name-plates should normally
be a laminated bicolor plastic, which when
engraved, the top layer is cut through allowing
the letter to show in the second color.
‫ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ دو رﻧﮓ‬3-6
6.4 Continuous panels for control of a number of
process units, as in the case of integrated plant,
shall have the panel sections clearly defined by
arrow-headed lines and labeled with the plant
designation at the top of the panel.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻮاﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻌﺪادي از واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬4-6
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺣﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ رﻧﮓ ﺳﻴﺎه ﻳﺎ‬.‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬.‫ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪاي ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ‬،‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫و ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﺎرتﻫﺎي ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮ و ﻧﻮع‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﺟﺎزه‬،‫ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪه‬،‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻻﻳﻪاي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ دوم ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﺋﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﻪ‬،‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺟﻬﺖدار ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻋﻨﻮان واﺣﺪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬-7
7. CONTROL PANELS
7.1 Panel layout for control houses shall permit the
operator or operators to observe the functioning of
all instruments from a central control point.
‫ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺎقﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻳﺎ‬1-7
7.2 It is desirable that each operator be provided
with a strategically positioned writing desk.
‫ ﺷﺎﻳﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺧﻮد‬2-7
7.3 Instruments which are required for
assessment of plant behavior shall be mounted in
such a manner as to be readable from the control
desk. Presentation may be in digital or analogue
form.
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺣﺪ‬3-7
7.4 Consideration may be given to providing
common recording points with facilities for
connection to a range of instruments measuring
process variables. These systems, when
connected into controller transmission loops,
must be designed so that the reliability of the
controller is not affected, and affects from
switching transients are avoided.
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻧﻘﺎط ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺎ‬4-7
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺟﺎزه را ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ در‬
.‫ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر را از ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‬
.‫را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ از ﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻓﺮم دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻳﺎ آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬.‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬،‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي را اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬،‫وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬار ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ و از اﺛﺮات ﮔﺬراي‬
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪزﻧﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
7.5 Instruments shall in general be of the
"miniature" type, ("Miniature" applies to
instruments approximately 144 mm × 144 mm or
smaller), and for smaller size shall be confirmed
by company / client.
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬5-7
7.6 The instalation height of instruments shall be
in accordance with the standard drawings
IPS-D-IN-116
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي‬6-7
‫)"ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮر" ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً در اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ و اﻧﺪازه ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ‬،(‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬144 ‫ در‬144
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-D-IN-116 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
10
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻟﻲ‬-8
8. CONSOLE TYPE PANELS
8.1 Instruments shall be grouped on inclined
and/or vertical panels. A desk shall be provided
as an integral part of the panel structure.
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﻳﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬1-8
8.2 The detailed design and quality of the
consoles shall be such that they can withstand
normal handling during transport.
‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ وﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺴﻮلﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬2-8
8.3 Sectional construction should be selected to
facilitate
manufacturing,
handling
and
transportation
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر‬،‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ و ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬3-8
8.4 Openings such as tube connections etc. shall
be covered to avoid entry of dust.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬،‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﺑﺎز ﻣﺜﻞ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻧﺎﻳﻪ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬4-8
8.5 To enable easy reassembling of the sections
on site, the wiring and the tubing to be
reconnected shall be properly identified. All
instruments and components packed separately
from the console shall also be properly identified.
،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ دوﺑﺎره ﺳﻮار ﻛﺮدن آﺳﺎن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت در ﻣﺤﻞ‬5-8
8.6 A small quantity of components e.g.,
ferrules, nuts, tubes, terminals and wires shall be
supplied with the console, for on site assembling
and small modifications.
‫ از‬،‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻤﻲ از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ در ﻣﺤﻞ‬6-8
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺰو ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر‬.‫ﮔﺮوه ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ورود ﮔﺮد وﺧﺎك ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ و ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﻨﺴﻮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ و‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي و ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل و ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻬﺮه‬،‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺴﻮل داده ﺷﻮد‬
MIMIC
‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬-‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬-9
9.1 Mimic diagrams, either drawn or built-up,
shall
be
mounted
immediately
above
conventional and free standing panels and may be
inclined forward at an angle of 15 degrees, if
specified in data sheet.
‫ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون‬،‫ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ‬1-9
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﺪاول و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ در‬،‫ درﺟﻪ‬15 ‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ در زاوﻳﻪ‬.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫داده ﺑﺮگ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
9. INSTRUMENT PANELS
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS
-
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ واﺣﺪ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬2-9
9.2 A semi-graphic representation shall be
provided in accordance with plant process and
utilities flow. Main process lines shall be 5 mm
and instrument lines shall be 3 mm.
.‫ ﻫﻮا و ﺳﻮﺧﺖ( ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ ﺑﺨﺎر‬،‫ ﺑﺮق‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲﻫﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ )آب‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬5 ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3
9.3 Generally fabrication by means of tiles for
indoor panels are in preference as rearrangement
and modification can be more conveniently
carried out.
،‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻮزاﻳﻴﻜﻲ‬3-9
9.4 Towers, drums, vessels and similar major
items of equipment shall be included in the
diagram. Pumps, compressors, heat exchangers
and other such items of equipment shall only be
shown when control or measuring instruments
are directly connected to them or to improve
understanding of the process.
‫ ﻇﺮوف و اﻗﻼم ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﺨﺎزن‬،‫ ﺑﺮجﻫﺎ‬4-9
‫ ﺑﺘﻮان ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ داده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در اﺻﻼح و آراﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪد‬
.‫راﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ آن را اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫ ﻣﺒﺪلﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﻛﻤﭙﺮوﺳﻮرﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﭘﻤﭗﻫﺎ‬.‫در ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻗﻼم ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﺟﻬﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ آنﻫﺎ وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
11
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻇﺮوف و ﮔﺮم ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺑﺮجﻫﺎ‬5-9
9.5 Constructional details of towers, vessels and
heaters shall not be shown unless required for
location of instrument connections.
‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻻزم‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
9.6 Major equipment symbols shall be scaled
from actual dimensions where possible.
‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺻﻠﻲ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اﺑﻌﺎد‬6-9
9.7 Instrument symbols shall be mounted external
to process lines and vessels, and as far as
possible, in the same relative position as their
associated panel mounted instruments.
‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬7-9
9.8 Instrument symbols shall be shown connected
with all relevant instrument measurement,
transmission, and control lines.
،‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬8-9
9.9 Where process lines cross, the horizontal line
shall be continuous, and the vertical line broken.
In all cases instrument lines shall be broken
where they cross a process line
‫ ﺧﻂ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ و‬،‫ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬9-9
9.10 Equipment symbols shall be marked with
both name and number.
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري‬،‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره و اﺳﻢ‬10-9
9.11 Instrument symbols shall be marked with
the process instrument tag number.
‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬11-9
9.12 Plant feed and products lines shall be
provided with in-line labels marked with the
name of the process fluid.
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ و ﻣﺤﺼﻮلﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎي روي‬12-9
9.13 Process lines shall be provided with arrow
heads to depict direction of flow.
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﺟﻬﺖ‬13-9
9.14 Instrument lines shall, where necessary, be
provided with arrow heads to illustrate cascade
connections.
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻬﺖدار‬،‫ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬14-9
9.15 Equipment and instrument symbols, lines,
and nameplates, shall be manufactured from
materials which will ensure freedom from
buckling with temperature changes.
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﭘﻼك‬،‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬15-9
9.16 Symbols, lines and labels shall be fixed to
the panel by means of an adhesive which will
allow for their removal with or without the
application of a solvent and without damaging
the painted surface of the main panel.
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ‬16-9
9.17 Mimic diagrams should be colored in
accordance with the following color code:
‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ زﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬17-9
.‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ درﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬،‫و ﻇﺮوف ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه و ﺗﺎ آﻧﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن دارد‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي واﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
.‫ارﺳﺎل و ﺧﻄﻮط ﻛﻨﺘﺮل وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬،‫ در ﺗﻤﺎم ﺣﺎﻻت‬.‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي‬
.‫ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻬﺖدار ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﻛﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺴﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ از ﺧﻢ ﻧﺸﺪن آنﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
.‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺣﻼل و ﺑﺪون ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ آنﻫﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫رﻧﮓ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي اﺻﻠﻲ‬
:‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
a) Main panel- semi-matt admiralty Grey
to RAL 7031 (BS-381C 697).
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي اﺻﻠﻲ ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮي درﻳﺎﺋﻲ‬
.(BS-381C 697) RAL 7031
12
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
b) Equipment symbols, towers, vessels,
etc., -semi-matt Dark Grey to RAL
7021 (BS-381C 632).
‫ ﻇﺮوف و ﻏﻴﺮه ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت‬،‫ ﺑﺮجﻫﺎ‬،‫ب(ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
c) Instrument symbols, and control
valves-semi-matt Black to RAL 7021.
‫ج( ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬
d) Instrument measurement, transmission
and control lines- semi-matt Black to
RAL 7021.
‫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﺧﻄﻮط ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ـ‬،‫د( اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
e) Water- matt pale rounded Blue to (BS381C 172).
.(BS-381C 172) ‫ﻫ( آب ـ آﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺷﻔﺎف‬
f) Steam-semi-matt signal Red to RAL
3001 (BS-381C 537).
‫و( ﺑﺨﺎر ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﭼﺮاغ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.(BS-381C 632) RAL 7021 ‫ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮي ﺗﻴﺮه‬
.RAL 7021 ‫ﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺎه‬
.RAL 7021 ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺎه‬
.(BS-381C 537) RAL 3001
g) Process Air-semi-matt White to RAL
9010.
.RAL 9010 ‫ز( ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
h) Hydrocarbon vapor and gas-semi-matt
Lemon to (BS-381C 355).
‫ح( ﺑﺨﺎر و ﮔﺎز ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﻟﻴﻤﻮﻳﻲ‬
i) Hydrocarbon liquids-Light buff to (BS381C 358), Traffic yellow to RAL
1023 (BS-381C 356) and Golden
Brown to RAL 8024 (BS-381C 414);
to distinguish, respectively, light
medium and heavy streams.
BS-381C ) ‫ط( ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ـ زرد ﻧﺨﻮدي‬
j) Chemicals and corrosive fluids- semimatt Light Brunswick Green to RAL
6027 (BS-381C 225).
‫ي( ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ و ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ـ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﺳﺒﺰ‬
.(BS-381C 355)
BS-381C ) RAL 1023 ‫ زرد ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬،(358
BS-) RAL 8024 ‫( و ﻗﻬﻮهاي روﺷﻦ‬356
،‫(؛ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬381C 414
.‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎنﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺒﻚ و ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬
BS-381C ) RAL 6027 ‫ﺑﺮاﻧﺰوﻳﻚ روﺷﻦ‬
.(225
9.18 A color code key shall be shown at one end
of the mimic diagram panel.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮف ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ‬18-9
10. PAINTING OF INSTRUMENTS AND
PANELS
‫ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬-10
10.1 The surface of panels except the inner
surfaces, for which items c, d and e (noted under)
are not required, shall be prepared and painted
with air-drying materials in accordance with the
following procedure:
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام از‬،‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺳﻄﻮح دروﻧﻲ‬1-10
.‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﻫ )ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه( ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻟﺰوم ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬،‫ د‬،‫ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي ج‬
‫ﻣﻮاد ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮا ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ آﻣﺎده‬
:‫ﺳﺎزي و رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
a) Surfaces of the finished panel shall be blast
cleaned and given one coat of etches primer,
except that zinc coated sheet shall be
degreased and not blast cleaned.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻄﻮح ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﻮده‬
‫ ﺑﺠﺰ ﻓﻠﺰ روي اﻧﺪود ﺷﺪه‬،‫و ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺎ اﺳﻴﺪ اوﻟﻴﻪ داده‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﺮﺑﻲ ﭘﺎك ﻧﻤﻮد و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﻮد‬
.‫ب( ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
b) One coat of gray primer shall be applied.
‫ج( دﻧﺪاﻧﻪﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎي ﻧﺎزك ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺸﻚ‬
c) Any indentations shall be filled with quick
drying putty in thin layers.
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮد‬
13
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
d) Two coats of quick drying knifing filler
shall be applied and allowed to dry overnight
before flatting.
‫د( دو ﻻﻳﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎردك ﺑﻜﺎر‬
e) The undercoat shall consist of one coat of
synthetic enamel ground coat.
‫ﻫ( ﭘﻮﺷﺶ زﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻟﻌﺎب ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬
f) The finish shall be one coat of synthetic
enamel, semi-matt or eggshell, color RAL
6004 Sea Green except that mimic diagram
panels shall be Admiralty Gray to RAL 7031
(BS-381C 697) semi-matt or eggshell.
‫ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﻳﺎ‬،‫و( ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻟﻌﺎب ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد و زﻣﺎن داد ﺗﺎ در ﻃﻮل ﺷﺐ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻌﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻤﺒﺎده زده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫روي ﻻﻳﻪ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺒﺰ درﻳﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺠﺰ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬RAL 6004 ‫ رﻧﮓ‬،‫ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﺨﻢ ﻣﺮﻏﻲ‬
RAL ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮي درﻳﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫( ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎت ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﺨﻢ ﻣﺮﻏﻲ‬BS-381C 697) 7031
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
10.2 Instruments shall be painted light Brunswick
green to RAL 6027 (BS-381C 225).
RAL ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺮاﻧﺰوﻳﻚ روﺷﻦ‬2-10
10.3 Any deviation from the colors of panels and
instruments shall be subject to the user approval.
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف از رﻧﮓ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬3-10
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬BS-381C 225) 6027
.‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬-11
11. PANEL CONSTRUCTION
11.1 Fabricate the control panel from 3 mm
(minimum) cold rolled steel formed members
except for the 100 mm channel base frame.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ از ﻓﻮﻻد ﻧﻮرد ﺳﺮد‬3 (‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎ )ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬1-11
11.2 Panel structure shall be entirely selfsupporting by the use of 50 mm structural angle
iron frame. Framing and brackets shall be as
necessary to achieve a rugged design and to
insure a smooth, flat surface with a maximum
deflection of 4 mm over total surface of panel
after installation of all instruments and accessory
equipment. Design and fabricate panel lengths
from a smooth, continuous panel surface. Provide
holes at panel joints complete with bolts, nuts,
and washers for panel assembly, shop-assemble
the entire unit and check for accurate alignment
and surface matching.
‫ ﺳﺎزه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﺎزه‬2-11
‫ ﺑﺠﺰ ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮب زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺷﻜﻞ داده ﺷﺪه ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬100 ‫ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮب و‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬50 ‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﭼﻮب آﻫﻦ زاوﻳﻪاي‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﺨﺖ و از ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺎف ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ در ﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﭘﺲ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻤﺎم‬4 ‫اﻧﺤﻨﺎ‬
‫ ﻃﻮل ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ‬.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻻزم ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد‬
‫ در اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬.‫از ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺎف ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
،‫ ﻣﻬﺮهﻫﺎ و واﺷﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮار ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺳﻮراخﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و در ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﺘﺮازي و ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﺳﻄﻮح ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮد‬
- Provide removable end side plates.
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت دو ﻃﺮف اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮس‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- Bottom and rear of the panel shall be
easily accessible.
11.3 The top section of the panel board shall be a
medium density semi-graphic display for each
panel unit.
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬3-11
11.4 For handling purposes, each shipping
section shall be provided with removable lifting
lugs designed for lifting without deforming the
panel.
‫ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ از ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ در ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬4-11
11.5 Cut outs for instruments must be within the
‫ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲﻫﺎ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬5-11
.‫ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ واﺣﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻼبﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﺪون ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ و‬
.‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
14
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
tolerances as specified by their manufacturer.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
.‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه آن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
11.6 Where cut outs are specified for future
instruments they shall be covered by 3 mm steel
removable plates, finished and painted the same
as the front of the panel.
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ آﻳﻨﺪه‬6-11
11.7 All burrs produced around cut outs or bolt
hole drillings must be ground smooth.
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﭘﻠﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮراخ ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬7-11
11.8 The rear panel area shall not be obstructed
by conduits, ducts, raceways, stiffeners, etc.
‫ راه‬،‫ داﻛﺖﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﭘﺸﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖﻫﺎ‬8-11
11.9 Filler panels, when specified, shall be
designed and furnished for bolting to the panel.
They shall be fabricated from 3-4 millimeters
cold-rolled steel plate with 50 mm turn back,
corners arc welded and ground smooth. The filler
panels shall be finished to match the panel color.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪن‬،‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬9-11
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي‬3 ‫ آنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻓﻮﻻدي‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي و‬
.‫ﺻﻴﻘﻞ داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻮﻫﺎن ﻛﺎري ﺻﺎف ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫ آن ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬.‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ و ﻣﻬﺮه ﺟﻬﺖ وﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي‬50 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ‬4-3 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي ﻧﻮرد ﺳﺮد‬
.‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﺪه و ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺎف ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ رﻧﮓ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻫﻤﺮﻧﮓ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
12.
ENCLOSED
PANELS
FOR
HAZARDOUS AND NON-HAZARDOUS
AREA CLASSIFICATIONS OUTDOOR &
INDOOR LOCATIONS
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺼﻮر ﺷﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬-12
12.1 Construction of panel shall be fully
enclosed. Face plate with remaining general
structure shall be 3 mm steel minimum. The base
shall consist of 100 mm high channel iron. Doors
and access plates shall be 1 mm steel minimum.
Doors shall be flush, fully gasketed, full height
and width of the panel, with louvers at the top
and bottom of the doors provided for air
circulation and heat removal. Stainless steel
piano type hinges, T-handles and rust and
corrosion resistant latches shall be provided. For
out door service a 500 mm deep removable
canopy shall be provided.
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺟﻠﻮﺋﻲ‬.‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺤﺼﻮر ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1-12
12.2 Painting and nameplates shall be as
mentioned before. See section 10.
‫ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي و ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ آﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً در‬2-12
12.3 Panels located in Hazardous Area shall be
designed, fabricated and tested as per relevant
protection standards, IEC 60529.
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ واﻗﻊ ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬3-12
‫ﺷﺪه ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ و ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ در داﺧﻞ و ﺑﻴﺮون‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3 ‫و ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺳﺎزه ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ از ﻓﻮﻻد‬
‫ دربﻫﺎ و‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬100 ‫ﺳﺎزه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آﻫﻦ ﻧﺎوداﻧﻲ‬
‫ دربﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﻮﻻد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ دودﻛﺶ‬،‫ ﻛﻞ ارﺗﻔﺎع و ﻋﺮض ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬،‫ واﺷﺮ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮاز‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﻮﺳﻲ در ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ دربﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮدش ﻫﻮا و ﺧﺮوج ﺣﺮارت‬
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮهﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻟﻮﻻﻫﺎ از ﻓﻮﻻد ﺿﺪ زﻧﮓ از ﻧﻮع ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ‬.‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ و ﻗﻔﻞﻫﺎي ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ و ﺿﺪ زﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬T ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ‬،‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺮون از ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬500
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬10 ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
،‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ‬IEC 60529 ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬-13
13. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﻮاي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬1-13
13.1 The panel board will be installed in an airconditioned pressurized control house classified
as non hazardous, suitable for general purpose
electrical devices and wiring. All components
and wiring must conform to the requirements of
the electrical codes. Ratings, construction and
testing, are in accordance with the applicable
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ و وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻣﻄﺒﻮع اﻳﻤﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﻄﻌﺎت و ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و‬،‫ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖﻫﺎ‬.‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻛﺪﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬
15
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
standards. All devices must be approved by UL,
or other equivalent establishments except those
categories for which no approval list has been
established and these must be approved by the
Purchaser. The edition of codes, standards and
approval lists, current at the time when
specification is issued for purchase, shall be
applicable.
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺠﺰ ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ‬UL ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻧﺠﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي آنﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ و‬
،‫ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎ و ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎي ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﺟﺎري در زﻣﺎن ﺻﺪور ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮگ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺻﺎدر ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
13.2 Fabricator shall proide the wiring for all
internal wiring of the panel.
.‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬2-13
13.3 Vertical raceways preferably shall be 100
mm wide. Separate raceways shall be provided
within the panel for isolation of each of the
following types of instruments wiring systems:
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬100 ‫ راه ﻫﺎي ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬3-13
‫ راه ﻫﺎي ﻋﺒﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﺮض داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫در داﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ‬
:‫ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫اﻧﻮاع ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
a) Thermocouple extension wire.
.‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻴﻢ راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬
b) DC signals (4 - 20 mA).
.(‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ آﻣﭙﺮ‬20 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬4 ) ‫ب( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
c) AC power and control wiring, with more
than 24 V DC.
‫ وﻟﺖ‬24 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫ج( ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻗﺪرت ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬
.‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
d) Pulse signals.
.‫د( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻟﺲ‬
e) Intrinsically Safe Signal (see paragraph
15.5.5).
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬5-5-15 ‫ﻫ( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
f) Bus
‫و( ﺷﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬4-13
13.4 When common terminal boxes are used,
these terminal boxes shall be divided into
sections separated by a metal barrier so as to
segregate the following types of signals:
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪاﻛﻨﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را‬
:‫ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲآﻣﭙﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬20 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬4 ‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
a) 4-20 mA DC instruments signals.
.‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
b) Thermocouple signals.
.‫ب( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬
c) AC power and control system wiring, with
more than 24 V DC.
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫ج( ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻗﺪرت ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬
.‫ وﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬24
d) Pulse signals.
.‫د( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻟﺲ‬
e) Intrinsically Safe signal in accordance with
IEC 60079-11.
‫ﻫ( ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.IEC 60079-11
‫ ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬5-13
13.5 Terminal blocks for instruments and control
wiring shall be medium duty, 300 to 600 volt
rating, and barrier type, of non-hygroscopic
material. Terminal blocks to be approved by the
Purchaser.
‫ ﻧﻮع‬،‫ وﻟﺖ‬600 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬300 ‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺟﺪاﺳﺎز از ﺟﻨﺲ ﺿﺪ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮔﺮدد‬
25 ‫ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي رﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬6-13
13.6 Terminal blocks shall be mounted on rails
with a minimum of 25 mm spacers between the
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ و رﻳﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
16
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
rail and the mounting surface. Separation
between the rows of terminal blocks shall be a
minimum of 80 mm for terminal blocks up to 600
mm long. Separation shall be 150 mm for longer
rows.
‫ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﺑﻴﻦ ردﻳﻒ ﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬600 ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎﻻي‬80
150 ،‫ ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ردﻳﻒﻫﺎي اﻓﻘﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲﺗﺮ‬.‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
13.7 Each terminal on panel mounted electrical
devices (such as push-button switches, indicating
lights, relays, ammeters, etc.) shall be wired to a
terminal block by the panel fabricator. These
terminal blocks shall be provided with protective
covers.
‫ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل روي وﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬7-13
(‫ آﻣﭙﺮﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫ رﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغﻫﺎي ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه‬،‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻓﺸﺎري‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮك ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬
.‫ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
13.8 All panel board wiring (with the exception of
thermocouple extension wire) shall be terminated
with lugs at both ends. These lugs shall be crimpon, vinyl self-insulating, locking type. All wires
shall be identified with instrument tag number and
terminal designation at both ends with heat shrink
markers.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ )ﺑﺠﺰ ﺳﻴﻢ راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬8-13
13.9 Terminal block spare terminals shall be
provided according to the following:
‫ ﺑﻠﻮك ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪول‬9-13
REQUIRED
TERMINALS
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع‬.‫ﺑﺴﺖ دو ﻃﺮف اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آن ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﻮجدار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬،‫وﻳﻨﻴﻞ ﺧﻮد ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و در دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬاري ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﺷﺪه ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬاري ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫زﻳﺮ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎي ﻻزم‬
ADDITIONAL
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬
SPARES
2-4
5-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-90
2-4
2
5-10
4
11-20
8
21-30
10
31-40
12
41-90
18
For more than 90, 20% spare shall be provided.
2
4
8
10
12
18
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻳﺪﻛﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬20 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬90 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬10-13
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺸﺪار و‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ و ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ‬.‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ آﻧﺎﻻﻳﺰري ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ ﺑﻠﻮكﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎرهﻫﺎي‬.‫وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
13.10 Terminal blocks shall be provided on
panels and subassemblies for power supply
wiring, alarm system wiring, and electrical
transmission lines. No terminal blocks are
permitted for neither thermocouple extension
wiring, nor for analytical instruments signal lines.
The signal lines for these instruments shall be
directly connected to the receiving instrument.
The terminal blocks shall be clearly identified
with engraved or embossed numbers.
13.11 The electrical supply to the instrument
panel shall be 24 V DC or 110 volts 50 Hz two
wire, grounded, single phase. For other power
supplies, see Appendix A.
‫ وﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬24 ‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬11-13
13.12 Normally PVC trunk type or sheet metal
wire ways, rigid or flexible conduit, or
combination of these should be used. When area
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﺎﺑﻞ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻓﻠﺰي ﻳﺎ‬12-13
‫ زﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ دو ﺳﻴﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬50 ‫ وﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬110 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬.‫ﺷﺪه ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪاي‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻌﻄﺎف و ﺳﺨﺖ‬، ‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎي ﭘﻲويﺳﻲ‬
17
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
classification permits, PVC insulated wires on
adequate trays may be used.
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اﺟﺎزه‬.‫از آنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻲويﺳﻲ در ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫دﻫﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
13.13 Disconnect switches shall be provided for
servicing requirements of all panel instruments.
One disconnect switch may be used to serve as
many as six chart drives. For electronic
instruments, cabinet type anunciators with
multiple alarm units, potentiometers and
emergency shut down solenoid valves and relays,
one disconnect switch shall be used per
instrument. Each disconnect switch shall be
clearly labeled to identify the particular
instruments or alarm units served by that switch.
For more details see also: IPS-E-IN-180,
"Electrical Power Supply & Distribution System".
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬13-13
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬.‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﻬﺖ راه اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺶ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺛﺒﺎت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه از ﻧﻮع ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺸﺪارﻫﺎي ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻮﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ و ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﻟﻨﻮﺋﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ اﺿﻄﺮاري و رﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬.‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ زده ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻳﺎ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ آن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬.‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
"‫ "ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬،IPS-E-IN-180
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬14-13
13.14 Isolation possibilities for supplies to
individual instruments shall be available, e.g., by
means of dedicated power distribution
fuse/socket boxes or fused terminals.
‫ ﻓﻴﻮز ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﺮق اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﻓﻴﻮزدار‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬15-13
13.15 Low Voltage DC Wiring
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ اﻓﺸﺎن روي‬
a) Wiring shall be stranded tinned
copper, color coded. Installation shall be
in separate conduit or slotted plastic duct
with 30% spare space provided.
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ آن در ﻛﺎﻧﺪوﺋﻴﺖ‬.‫اﻧﺪود و داراي ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ‬30 ‫ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ داﻛﺖ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﻴﺎردار ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬5-15 ‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
For more details see paragraph 15.5.
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬16-13
13.16 AC Wiring
AC wiring shall be 2.5 mm2, stranded tinned
copper, twisted pair, color coded, and 600 volt
rating insulation.
‫ ﻣﺴﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬2/5 ‫ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ داراي ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ و ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬،‫ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪه‬،‫اﻓﺸﺎن روي اﻧﺪود‬
.‫ وﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬600 ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ‬
14. AIR SUPPLY TO PNEUMATIC PANELS
(‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ)ﺑﺎدي‬-14
14.1 The instrument air header shall run the full
length of the panel, and shall be constructed of
brass pipe and fittings, cadmium plated. Brass
unions shall be supplied between panel sections.
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻮا در ﺗﻤﺎم ﻃﻮل ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻟﻮﻟﻪ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬1-14
14.2 The dual-air regulator filter station shall be
supplied with 3-way brass cocks connected to
allow either regulator or filter to be used to
supply air to the header. These stations shall be
such as to permit removal of the filter cartridges
without disassembly of piping, and to permit
disassembly of either regulator/filter without
interfering with the operation of the other unit,
‫ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ رﮔﻼﺗﻮر ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬2-14
‫ ﺑﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺑﺮﻧﺠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﺎدﻣﻴﻮم ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻬﺮه ﻣﺎﺳﻮره ﺑﺮﻧﺠﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ راﻫﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮان ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬3 ‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻧﺠﻲ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫اﺻﻠﻲ از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ رﮔﻼﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﺗﺮﻳﺞ‬،‫ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪون ﭘﻴﺎده ﻛﺮدن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺘﻮان ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ رﮔﻼﺗﻮر را ﺑﺪون ﻣﺪاﺧﻠﻪ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه‬،‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت آن را ﭘﻴﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد واﺣﺪﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬
18
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
provide cock handles attached to the cocks.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
.‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
IPS-G-IN-200 ‫ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
.‫"ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻮاي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
For more information, reference to be made to:
IPS-G-IN-200 "Instrument Air System".
‫ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ داراي رﮔﻼﺗﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر‬3-14
14.3 Where each panel instrument has its own
pressure reducing regulator and filter set, the
header shall be of galvanized steel pipe.
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻻدي‬،‫و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﺎﻟﻮاﻧﻴﺰه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ اﻧﺸﻌﺎب ﺷﻴﺮ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ آﺗﻲ‬4-14
14.4 For future expansion, spare valve take-off
connections shall be provided on the air header.
The spare connections shall not be less than 20%
of the existing take-offs.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻮا در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ درﺻﺪ اﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬20 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
14.5 For long curved panels, in order to facilitate
field connection, the header shall be joined
between panel sections with a flange or union
type connection.
‫ در ﺟﻬﺖ آﺳﺎن ﻧﻤﻮدن‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬5-14
14.6 A drain valve shall be provided at the
bottom end of the header, farthest from the air
supply source.
،‫ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻮا‬6-14
14.7 Control and transmission lines and
interconnecting lines between panels and
subassemblies shall be brought to bulkhead fittings.
The bulkhead fittings shall be installed on top of the
panel. The bulkhead fittings shall be adequate for
connecting the tubing from the field.3
‫ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺧﻄﻮط اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ و‬7-14
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻬﺮه ﻣﺎﺳﻮره ﺑﻬﻢ وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫دورﺗﺮ از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬.‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ آورده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ از ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ از‬8-14
14.8 When PVC multi tubing is used for
connecting field instruments to the control
instruments, the bulkhead fitting shall be
mounted vertically and housed in a detachable
enclosed junction box. The junction box shall be
freely installed on top of panel.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬،‫ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻲويﺳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻧﺼﺐ و در ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺤﺼﻮر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪا‬
‫ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬.‫ ﺟﺎ داده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻛﺮدﻧﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬9-14
14.9 When copper tubing is used for connecting
field instruments to the control room instruments,
the bulkhead fittings shall be mounted vertically.
‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده‬
.‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
14.10 Each bulkhead connection shall be clearly
labeled with the designation of the particular
instrument or connection it serves.
‫ ﻫﺮ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ‬10-14
14.11 Testing of the air supply header and signal
tubing shall be accomplished with air. Each joint
shall be tested with a soap and water solution and
shall be absolutely tight. Instruments shall be also
tested in the manner prescribed by their
manufacturer. For testing refer to IPS-I-IN-100,
“Inspection Standard for
General Instrument
Systems".
‫ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا و ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮا‬11-14
14.12 The relief valve and pressure gage on the
air header shall be constructed of brass, bronze,
‫ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﻮا و ﺳﻨﺠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر در ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬12-14
.‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل آن را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻮل آب و ﺻﺎﺑﻮن آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮدد و‬.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن آن آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ "اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬،IPS-I-IN-100
.‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬.‫ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻد ﺿﺪ زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺰ‬،‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺞ‬
19
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
or stainless steel. The relief valve shall be
minimum 1 inch inlet size, set to relieve at 1.7
bar (g) and shall be supplied with a lifting lever.
‫ ﺑﺎر‬1/7 ‫ اﻳﻨﭻ و ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ در‬1 ‫ﻫﻮا در ورودي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
14.13 Unless otherwise shown on the panel
drawings, all pneumatic tubing shall be copper,
PVC coated, ¼" O.D. by 0.8 mm wall thickness
as minimum.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ﺑﺎ روﻛﺶ‬13-14
14.14 Tubing fittings shall be compression type
of purchaser approved manufacturer.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﻓﺸﺮده و از ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻣﻮرد‬14-14
14.15 All tubing shall be clamped or supported
from the panel frame-work as required to prevent
sagging. No clamps or supports shall be attached
to the instruments.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‬15-14
14.16 Tubing runs shall be horizontal or vertical
with each 90 degree bend. Tubing bends shall be
rigidly held to limit the tubing bending radius to
15 mm min.
90 ‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﺎ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي‬16-14
14.17 Tubing runs shall be arranged so that visual
tracing is possible, and finger tracing will not be
required.
‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ داده ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬17-14
14.18 The panel fabricator shall supply a
bulkhead plate as shown on the panel drawings,
fitted with bulkhead fittings, and 10 spare
bulkhead fittings and locations shall be provided.
Fittings shall be suitable for connection of copper
tubing of panel to plastic tubing of field incoming
tubes.
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در‬18-14
14.19 Tubing shall be installed separately from
wiring, in PVC ducting with a cover.
‫ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ از ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ‬19-14
15. SYSTEM CABINET ARRANGEMENT
(ELECTRONIC AUXILIARY ENCLOSURES)
(‫آراﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ )ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬-15
‫ﭘﻲويﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ¼ اﻳﻨﭻ در ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﭼﻴﺰ دﻳﮕﺮي‬،‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0/8
.‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه اي‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻻزم ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻧﺤﻨﺎي ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺷﻌﺎع اﻧﺤﻨﺎي‬.‫درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺪود ﮔﺮدد‬15 ‫ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ و ﺟﻬﺖﻳﺎﺑﻲ اﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ ﻻزم ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫دﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖﻳﺎﺑﻲ را داﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ و ﺗﻌﺪاد‬،‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ را ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺪﻛﻲ و ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎي آن را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬10
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺴﻲ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎي ورودي ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻳﻪﻛﺸﻲ‬
.‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ از ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬،‫داﻛﺖﻫﺎي ﭘﻲويﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-15
15.1 General
15.1.1 The system cabinet typically consists of an
enclosure containing:
‫ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬1-1-15
:‫ﻛﻪ داراي‬
- Circuitry, see 15.3.
.‫را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬3 -15 ‫ ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﺪارﺑﻨﺪي‬.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬5-15 ‫ ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎ و ﺳﻮﻛﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬6-15 ‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق‬،‫ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ و رﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﻮقﻫﺎ‬8 -15
- Internal wiring, see 15.5.
- Terminals and sockets for external
wiring, see 15.6.
- Accessories, such as electrical supply
units, see15.8 and relays for operating
howlers.
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻣﻮارد‬10 ‫ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬2-1-15
15.1.2 The total capacity of the cabinet shall
include 10% for contingencies, i.e., to cover
changes in the project scope which may occur
‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در داﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﭘﺮوژه ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
20
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
during the engineering phase, plus 20% for future
use.
20 ‫ ﺑﻪ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬،‫اﺳﺖ در ﻓﺎز ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ اﺗﻔﺎق ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ را ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫درﺻﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در آﻳﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
15.1.3 Cabinets should be delivered with all slots
wired to proper sockets/terminations/wrapping
boards, to allow expansion of the system to
maximum cabinet capacity, by card/module
insertion only.
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮراخﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ‬3-1-15
‫ در‬،‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرت‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬
.‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ واﺣﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬2-15
15.2 The Enclosure
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از ﻧﻮع ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه در داده‬1-2-15
15.2.1 System cabinets should be of the type and
manufactured as specified by the Purchaser in the
data sheets. Cabinets to manufacturer/supplier’s
own standards require the approval of the
Purchaser in writing.
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬.‫ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
The enclosure shall be constructed in sheet steel,
be suitable for indoor use and meet the
requirements of IP 41 of IEC 60529, unless
otherwise specified.
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در داﺧﻞ‬،‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ورق ﻓﻮﻻدي‬
IP 41 ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻛﺪ‬،‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي‬،‫ را دارا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IEC 60529 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
15.2.2 The finish and color of the enclosure shall
be as per Section10, unless otherwise specified in
data sheet. A small quantity of touch-up paint say
0.25 Liter, shall be supplied with each cabinet
10 ‫ رﻧﮓ و ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬2-2-15
15.2.3 The cabinet shall be fitted with removable
eyebolts for lifting purposes.
‫ ﻣﻬﺮهﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪاي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬3-2-15
15.2.4 The temperature inside the cabinet shall
not exceed 10°C above the maximum control
room temperature when all internal equipment
and external loads are energized.
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات داﺧﻠﻲ‬،‫ دﻣﺎي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬4-2-15
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در داده ﺑﺮگ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ‬0/25 ً‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻤﻲ از رﻧﮓ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺜﻼ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ درﺟﻪ‬10 ‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫و ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺮق دار ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
Cabinets will generally be installed in an
environment with a temperature limit between 22
and 26°C ( 24±2 ) with humidity between 40 and
50%.
‫ درﺟﻪ‬26 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬22 ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎي‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬50 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬40 ‫( ﺑﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬24±2) ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
15.2.5 The limits shall be as stated in the data sheets,
and it shall be ensured that the maximum allowable
temperature inside the cabinet is not exceeded.
،‫ ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت داده ﺑﺮگ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5-2-15
15.2.6 For temperature and humidity limits
during storage and transportation, class C 1 of
IEC 60654-1, and for mechanical vibration and
shock, class VSI of IEC 60654-3, shall apply.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎ و رﻃﻮﺑﺖ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن و‬6-2-15
15.2.7 The allowance for air contaminants shall
be as specified in the data sheets. ISA-S71- 04, or
‫ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ آﻧﭽﻪ در داده ﺑﺮگ ﻫﺎ‬7-2-15
‫و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز داﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ و ﺑﺮاي‬،IEC 60654-1 ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬C1 ‫ ﻛﻼس‬،‫ﺣﻤﻞ وﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬VSI ‫ ﻛﻼس‬،‫ﻟﺮزش ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ و ﺷﻮك‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬IEC 60654-3
‫ ﻳﺎ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ‬،ISA-S71-04 ‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬.‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
21
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
the final edition of IEC 60654-4, should be used
as a guide for specifying environmental
conditions.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬،IEC 60654-4 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
15.2.8 Two options are available for cooling the
cabinet internals depending on the amount of the
heat generated inside:
‫ دو اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻨﻚ ﺳﺎزي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬8-2-15
:‫ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺮﻣﺎي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه در داﺧﻞ‬
a) Natural ventilation by means of
screened and louvered openings in the
doors and in the top of the cabinet.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺗﻮري دار و ﺑﺎ‬
b) Forced ventilation by means of
openings in the doors fitted with dust
filters and with extraction fans mounted
in the top of the cabinet fitted with finger
guards.
‫ب( ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي دربﻫﺎ‬
.‫دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ در دربﻫﺎ و در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺿﺪ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎ ﻓﻦﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺧﺎرج ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﻮا ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
.‫اﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﺣﺮارت ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬9-2-15
15.2.9 The manufacturer shall provide a
calculation of heat generated under the worst
possible conditions, i.e., with all loads energized,
at the maximum ambient temperature.
‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺑﺮقدار‬،‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ را اراﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه در ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت‬،‫ ﻧﻮع ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬10-2-15
15.2.10 The type of ventilation selected for the
cabinet, based on the heat calculation provided
by the manufacturer, shall be indicated in the data
sheets. If the temperature under the conditions as
specified, will remain within 10°C above the
maximum
ambient
temperature,
natural
ventilation shall be applied. Otherwise forced
ventilation will be required to limit the
temperature rise inside the cabinet to within
10°C.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺣﺮارت ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
10 ‫ در‬،‫ اﮔﺮ دﻣﺎي ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ داده ﺷﺪه‬.‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬،‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﺑﺎﻻي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا‬.‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
10 ‫در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎ در داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﻻزم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
‫ اﺛﺮات ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ‬11-2-15
15.2.11 Side panels shall not be considered to
give cooling effects.
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
When cabinets are bolted together with the side
plates removed, it shall be ensured that the cooling
airflow remains effective for all critical internal
components.
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻛﻨﺎري ﺑﻬﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﻮاي ﺧﻨﻚ در ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬،‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺤﺮاﻧﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
15.2.12 A fan-failure alarm shall be provided for
cabinets with forced ventilation. The alarm shall
be available, either as potential free contacts on
dedicated terminals in the cabinet, or as a
dedicated socket, connected to the door of the
cabinet and on the operating control desk.
‫ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻓﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ‬12-2-15
‫ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎي ﺑﺪون ﺑﺮق در‬.‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﻛﺖﻫﺎي اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬
،‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ درب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
15.2.13 Dust filters shall be of the replaceable or
cleanable type, and this action shall be possible
without disturbing the functioning of the cabinet.
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺿﺪ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ از‬13-2-15
15.2.14 Unless otherwise specified in the data
sheets:
:‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬14-2-15
‫ و اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺪون ﻣﺰاﺣﻤﺖ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ﻧﻮع ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
22
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
- Fans should be connected to an AC
interruptible,
maintained
supply,
(see15.9).
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬،‫ ﻓﻦﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ‬‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬9–15 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه وﺻﻞ ﮔﺮدد )ﺑﻪ‬
.(‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮد اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﺑﺎ دربﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ‬‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ و‬،‫ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺑﻮده‬
.‫ﺳﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- The cabinet shall be free standing with
front and back doors, thus providing
access to equipment, wiring and
terminations.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ روي دﻳﻮار ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي‬15-2-15
15.2.15 If wall-mounted cabinets or back-to-back
mounted cabinets are specified in the data sheets,
all equipment, wiring and terminations shall be
accessible from the front.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ و ﺳﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ از ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺑﻮده ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان‬16-2-15
15.2.16 The side panels shall be removable so
that it is possible to mount the cabinets side by
side and properly connect them together.
Therefore, the sidewalks shall not be used for
cable entry or ventilation openings, etc.
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ را در ﻛﻨﺎر ﻫﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮد و ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻬﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ دﻳﻮارهﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري ﺑﺮاي ورود ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮد‬
.‫درﻳﭽﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ‬،‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون‬17-2-15
15.2.17 The application of swing out frames
requires the written approval of the Purchaser.
.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار را ﻻزم دارد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
The application of swing out frames should be
avoided wherever possible. They shall not be
applied in cabinets for safeguarding equipment.
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ آنﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
15.2.18 If swing-out frames are specified in the
data sheets, special attention shall be given to the
maximum weight of equipment allowed on the
frame in the swung out position. The connecting
wire "bundle" to the equipment on the swing out
frame shall be adequately protected. Doorstops
and swing-frame stops shall be provided.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ‬18-2-15
‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل‬.‫در ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻣﺒﺬول داﺷﺖ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دربﻫﺎ و ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب‬.‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﮔﺮدد و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬19-2-15
15.2.19 The size of the cabinet shall be stated in
the data sheets and should be selected from the
following sizes:
10
Height
mm
2000/2100
2000/2100
2000/2100
:‫از اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
Depth
mm
600
600/800
600/800
Width
mm
600
800
1200
15.2.20 The height indicated above may include a
plinth for door clearance, etc. All dimensions
given are in millimeters.
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬20-2-15
15.2.21 The size of cabinets, i.e., height and
depth, should be consistent within the same
control or auxiliary room.
‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ارﺗﻔﺎع و ﻋﻤﻖ در اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬21-2-15
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ درب و ﻏﻴﺮه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺘﺮ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫و اﺗﺎق ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎن و ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
23
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬600 ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎي داراي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮض‬22-2-15
15.2.22 For enclosures having a width of 600 mm
maximum, one door is acceptable, for wider
enclosures two doors should be provided. Doors
and side panels shall be easily removable.
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻫﺎي ﻋﺮﻳﺾﺗﺮ دو‬،‫ ﻳﻚ درب ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ دربﻫﺎ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫درب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
Single doors of 800 mm may be applied provided
escape routes allow for such doors. Regulations
for escape routes shall be adhered to.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻧﻈﺮ‬800 ‫دربﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮض‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮط آﻧﻜﻪ راهﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻳﺰ اﻳﻦ اﺟﺎزه را ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ راهﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
15.2.23 For those systems where observation of
the equipment by operating or electrical
maintenance personnel is required without
opening the doors, clear acrylic windows or
laminated glass windows shall be specified in the
data sheets.
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬23-2-15
15.2.24 Each cabinet should be provided with
either a separate handle and lock or with a lock
inserted in the handle. Unless otherwise specified
in the data sheets, the locking arrangement shall
be to manufacturer’s standards. Each lock shall be
identical for all cabinets provided by the same
supplier and these cabinets shall have 2 keys.
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ و ﻗﻔﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬24-2-15
15.2.25 For extensions to existing plants, the locks
and handles should preferably match those of the
existing cabinets.
‫ ﻗﻔﻞﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮهﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬25-2-15
15.2.26 Cable entry shall be in the bottom of the
cabinet unless otherwise specified by the
Purchaser. Sufficient freely accessible space shall
be available for accommodating and terminating
all cables. The cabinet shall be provided with
properly designed cable clamps and cable support
rails in order not to exert any undue force on
terminations.
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ‬،‫ ورودي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬26-2-15
15.2.27 Unless ventilation is required through the
bottom of the cabinet, all holes remaining after
entry of the cables shall be properly sealed against
the entry of dust. The dust seal shall be such that it
is easily removed for the entry of other cables.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻮراخﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﻌﺪ از ورود ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬27-2-15
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﺑﺮق ﺑﺪون ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن دربﻫﺎ ﻻزم‬
‫ ﭘﻨﺠﺮهﻫﺎي روﺷﻦ اﻛﺮﻳﻠﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮهﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ‬،‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻻﻳﻪ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ آراﻳﺶ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬.‫ﻗﻔﻞ در دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي در داده‬،‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬.‫ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬2 ‫ﻫﻤﺎن ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي‬
.‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻀﺎي‬.‫آﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ آزاد و ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎ دادن و ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺴﺖﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ و‬.‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫رﻳﻞﻫﺎي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻛﺎﺑﻞ در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺪون‬
.‫ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻴﺮوي زﻳﺎد‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ‬،‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ورود ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك آبﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ آبﺑﻨﺪي در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬.‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ از ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ورود ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‬
.‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺪارﺑﻨﺪي‬3-15
15.3 The Circuitry
‫ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ و ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮقدارﻛﺮدن ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺪ‬.‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬، ‫ﻛﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪار ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در‬
.‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎ اﺛﺮ ﮔﺬار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The power and output circuits shall be rated for
simultaneously energizing the complete system.
All output circuits shall be short-circuit proof, and
the shorting of one output circuit shall not affect
other circuits.
24
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ از ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎي ﺗﻜﻲ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از اﺛﺮ ﮔﺬاريﻫﺎي ﻣﺬﻛﻮر‬
‫ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻳﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
To avoid the mentioned interactions indicated,
individual fusing of the output circuits or current
limiting devices should be employed.
(‫ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي راه اﻧﺪاز )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ‬1-3-15
15.3.1 Initiating circuits (field instruments)
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-1-3-15
15.3.1.1 General
‫ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي راه اﻧﺪاز ﺟﺰو ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ از اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎب‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲآﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻬﺮﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي راه‬
.‫اﻧﺪاز ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‬
Initiating circuits do not form part of this
Standard; however it shall be ensured that the
specifications of the initiating circuits are
compatible with those of the system cabinet
circuitry as appropriate.
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎ‬2-1-3-15
15.3.1.2 Contacts
‫ﻣﺪارﺑﻨﺪي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي ﺑﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ راه اﻧﺪاز ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ و از ﻧﻮع ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬،‫ ﺑﺪون ﺑﺮق‬،‫آزاد از اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل و ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎز در‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ‬.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي راه اﻧﺪاز در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ب( داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ‬،‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ راه اﻧﺪاز ﻏﻴﺮ از ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه در داده ﺑﺮگ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The system circuitry shall be capable of operating
with initiating devices which are free from earth,
potential-free, and of the snap-acting type, with
the contacts closed in the normal condition and
open in abnormal conditions. Typical electrical
characteristics for initiating contacts are given in
Appendix B. For initiating devices other than
contacts, the electrical characteristics shall be as
specified in the appropriate data sheet.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
1) The current passing through the initiating
contacts shall be at least 1 mA DC and energy
needed for initiating a change in system status
shall be at least 10 mW.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬1 ‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻋﺒﻮري از ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎي اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬-1
2) The initiating devices may be located in a
hazardous area, in which case the type of
protection shall be suitable for those areas.
‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ راه اﻧﺪاز ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬-2
‫آﻣﭙﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ و اﻧﺮژي ﻻزم ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ وات ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ در اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﻧﻮع ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﻤﺎن‬،‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬4-15
15.4 Electronic Card Frames
a) The circuit cards shall be mounted vertically
in card frames which are securely fixed to
standard 480 mm (19 inch) racks in the
enclosure. The height of the racks shall be
subject to the approval of manufacturer’s
standard.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻛﺎرتﻫﺎي ﻣﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭼﺎرﭼﻮبﻫﺎي ﻛﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
b) The card frames shall be provided with
connectors and card guides enabling the
correct insertion of the circuit cards, and
providing adequate separation, both electrically
and mechanically, between them.
‫ب( ﭼﺎرﭼﻮبﻫﺎي ﻛﺎرت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﺷﻴﺎر ﻛﺎرت در‬
c) Each card frame and the card which will be
inserted, shall be marked for identification,
either by consecutive numbering and type, or if
agreed by the user, by the manufacturer’s
standard code.
،‫ج( ﻫﺮ ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﻛﺎرت و ﻛﺎرت ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻴﺎر ﻗﺮار ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬480 ‫ ﻛﻪ در ﻗﻔﺴﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬.‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( در ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬19) ‫ﻣﺘﺮي‬
.‫ﻗﻔﺴﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ و ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي‬،‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎرتﻫﺎي ﻣﺪار ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ و ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ آنﻫﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎرهﻫﺎي ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ‬
‫ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻫﻢ و ﻧﻮع آن‬
.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
25
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
d) Spare positions shall be fitted with edge
connectors and blanking plates.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫د( ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻟﺒﻪ اي و ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﺼﺐ‬1-4-15
15.4.1 Mounting plates
،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎ دادن ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺠﺰا‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﻲ در ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﺼﺐ‬
:‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
When a cabinet is used for housing a variety of
discrete components, either rack-mounted or
individually on a mounting plate, the following
constructional details shall be taken into account:
‫اﻟﻒ( اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ؛‬
a) Earthing of the mounting plate;
b) Provision of sufficient space for the
removal of covers and for testing;
‫ب( دﻳﺪن ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎ و‬
c) Building of a dedicated tester/adjuster
as appropriate if the cabinet contains
many similar items;
،‫ج( اﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻗﻼم ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ زﻳﺎد دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
d) Equipment removal from the front
without disturbing other equipment;
‫د( ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات از ﺟﻠﻮ و ﺑﺪون اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﺰاﺣﻤﺖ‬
e) Accessibility of all wiring
terminations from the front;
‫ﻫ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲﻫﺎ و‬
‫ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دﻳﮕﺮ؛‬
and
‫ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ از ﺟﻠﻮ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ؛‬
f) Cable entry, which shall be in
accordance with clause15.2.
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2-15 ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺑﻨﺪ‬،‫و( ورودي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ‬5-15
15.5 Internal Wiring
15.5.1 The internal wiring shall be adequately
sized for the required voltages and currents. The
conductor cross-section shall be such that the
voltage drop is less than 2%.
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ وﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎ و ﺟﺮﻳﺎنﻫﺎي ﻻزم‬1-5-15
15.5.2 When a large number of wires are laid
together in ducting or in a bundle, a current
derating of 50% of the nominal rating should be
applied.
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي از ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ در ﻳﻚ داﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ‬2-5-15
15.5.3 All wires in screw type terminals shall be
provided with wire markers.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ در ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﻧﻮع ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي‬3-5-15
15.5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the
requisition, or agreed by the user, the color coding
of wires shall be as table 1:
،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ ﻛﺪ رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح ﺟﺪول‬4-5-15
‫ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ درﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻓﺖ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ درﺻﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬50 ‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن اﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬،‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺧﻮاﺑﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
.‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬاري ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﮕﺮ در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ‬
:‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
26
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
TABLE 1- CODING AND COLOR OF WIRES
‫ ﻛﺪﺑﻨﺪي و رﻧﮓ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ‬-1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
Coding of Wires
‫ﻛﺪﺑﻨﺪي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
1. Power 24 V DC positive ‫ وﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬24 ‫ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬-1
2. Negative
4. Neutral
6. Safety earth
7. Signal earth
- Red
‫ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬-2 - Black
‫ ﻓﺎز‬، ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬-3 - Brown
‫ ﻧﻮل‬-4
- Light Blue
3. Voltage, Phase
5. Input and output signals
Color of Wires
‫رﻧﮓ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺳﺮخ‬‫ ﺳﻴﺎه‬‫ ﻗﻬﻮه اي‬‫ آﺑﻲ روﺷﻦ‬-
‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻫﺎي ورودي و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬-5 - White (or blue , for intrinsically safe signals)
(‫ آﺑﻲ‬،‫ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ) ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻫﺎي ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ‬‫ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻦ‬-6
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬-7
8. Thermocouple extension wires
- Green/Yellow
- Green
‫ زرد‬-‫ ﺳﺒﺰ‬‫ ﺳﺒﺰ‬-
- As specified in the data sheets, which is to be based
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬-8 on IPS-M-IN-120" Temperature Instruments"
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه در داده ﺑﺮگ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫"ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ دﻣﺎ" ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IPS-M-IN-120
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
‫ وﻟﺖ و‬50 ‫( ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل از ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬1
1) Signal wiring from internal supply with a
voltage higher than 50 V and signal wiring from
external supply sources with a voltage higher then
50 V may be suitably colored to provide an
additional warning. The colors Orange and
Orange/White should be used respectively, if not
otherwise specified in the requisition.
‫ وﻟﺖ‬50 ‫ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل از ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﺟﻬﺖ اﺧﻄﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ رﻧﮓ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ رﻧﮓﻫﺎي ﻧﺎرﻧﺠﻲ‬،‫اﮔﺮ در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫و ﻧﺎرﻧﺠﻲ ـ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ‬2
2) Care shall be taken that interference susceptible
signal lines are not affected by high current
carrying lines. Refer to IPS-E-IN-190 transmission
systems.
.‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺎﻻ اﺛﺮ ﮔﺬار ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬IPS-E-IN-190 ‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼع ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
15.5.5 All wiring should be laid in PVC ducting
with a removable cover. Intrinsically safe wiring
shall be contained in separate ducting. The cover
of this ducting should be colored blue.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داﻛﺖ ﭘﻲويﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ‬5-5-15
15.5.6 For new projects, at least 30% spare
capacity shall be available in the ducting when all
wiring is complete.
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬30 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮوژهﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬6-5-15
15.5.7 Spare wires shall not be left loose in the
ducting, they shall be properly terminated.
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در داﻛﺖ آزاد ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬7-5-15
15.5.8 Connections shall not be made in the
ducting.
.‫ در داﺧﻞ داﻛﺖﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬8-5-15
15.5.9 Wires and cables in the ducting shall not
have excessive spare length.
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ وﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ در داﺧﻞ داﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮل ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬9-5-15
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ در‬.‫درﭘﻮش ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ ﺧﻮاﺑﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ درﭘﻮش داﻛﺖ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻧﮓ آﺑﻲ‬.‫داﻛﺖ ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻛﻲ در داﻛﺖ ﻛﺸﻲ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ آنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
27
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ در داﺧﻞ داﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺣﺘﻲ‬10-5-15
15.5.10 Wiring shall lie neatly in the ducting even
when the covers are removed.
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ درﭘﻮش آنﻫﺎ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺧﻮاﺑﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
a) Socket and prefabricated cable
connected to plug shall be used for cabinet
interconnection.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﻮﻛﺖ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼگ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎﻻت داﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬11-5-15
15.5.11 The socket-boards shall be mounted in the
cabinet such that:
:‫ﻛﻪ‬
a) The plugs can be easily inserted or
withdrawn, sufficient space shall be
available for the plugs and the cable loops.
‫اﻟﻒ( ﭘﻼگﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ و ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ‬
b) The loops shall be arranged such that
force is not exerted on the plug/socket
assembly.
‫ب( ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري آراﻳﺶ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ و‬،‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻼگﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼگ ﻓﺸﺎر وارد ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ج( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺧﻄﺎ ﻳﺎ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
c) The socket-board can be reached for
fault finding or adding wiring for new
circuits, with the wiring technique as
selected from 15.6.1.
‫ ﻛﻪ از روش‬،‫ﻧﻤﻮدن ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺘﻮان‬،‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬1-6-15 ‫ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻧﻤﻮد‬
d) Sufficient access and space should
therefore be available.
.‫د( دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ و ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﻼگﻫﺎ و ﺳﻮﻛﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻛﺪ ﭘﻼرﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻮده ﻛﻪ‬12-5-15
15.5.12 Plugs and sockets shall have a polarity code
such that interchanging between different types of
voltages are not possible. Signal segregation for
Intrinsically Safe signals shall be in accordance with
the requirements of IEC 60079-11.
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎ اﻣﻜﺎنﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬IEC 60079-11 ‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﻧﻮع‬13-5-15
15.5.13 All terminations using screw type terminals
shall be straight through, non-pinching and spring
backed to hold the wire, with only one wire in each
terminal. The type and manufacturer of the terminals
shall be specified in the data sheets.
‫ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪن و ﺑﺎ واﺷﺮ ﻓﻨﺮي‬،‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬،‫ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﻮع و‬.‫ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ در ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﻢ‬
.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ روش ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ‬6-15
15.6 Wiring Techniques
‫ روشﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬1-6-15
15.6.1 The following techniques should be applied
for the termination of internal wiring:
:‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
a) Crimped-on contacts and pins:
:‫اﻟﻒ( اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮﺳﻲ‬
1) Shall be used for stranded flexible
wires of minimum size 1.5 mm2, voltage
rating 250 V and with insulation suitable
for temperatures up to 80°C.
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬،‫( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢ اﻓﺸﺎن اﻧﻌﻄﺎفﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬1
250 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬، ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬1/5
‫ درﺟﻪ‬80 ‫وﻟﺖ و ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ دﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
2)The manufacturer’s recommendations
shall be followed for the size of the
crimp pins and contacts and for the type
and correct application of crimping tools
to produce high quality connections
consistently.
‫( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺪازه اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و‬2
‫ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮع و ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﻬﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
28
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
‫( اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﭘﺮس ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ‬1
1) The crimping tools shall be checked for wear at
regular intervals and be replaced when
manufacturer’s tolerances have been exceeded.
،‫ﮔﺮدد و در ﺻﻮرت اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪن ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮔﺮدد‬
2) The tools shall have a single torque value and
be of the non-return type until the crimp has been
made.
‫( اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻄﻠﻮب و از ﻧﻮع ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬2
.‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻮده ﺗﺎ ﭘﺮس ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
3) Crimp connections shall not be made on solid
wires (solid wires shall be used only for
thermocouple extension wires).
‫( اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬3
‫)ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.(.‫ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ب( اﺗﺼﺎﻻت واﻳﺮ رپ‬
b) Wire wraps connections:
0/2 ‫اﻳﻦ روش ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺪازهﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد اﻳﻦ روش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮔﺮدد‬
This technique is used with small wire sizes,
not less than 0.2mm2. The application of this
method shall be approved by the Purchaser.
15.6.2 The wiring for power supply units shall
have terminal connections with the rating adequate
for the load.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي‬،‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻗﺪرت‬2-6-15
15.6.3 The selected wiring technique shall be as
stated in the requisition. The terminations and wire
sizes may be to manufacturer’s standards, but only
with the approval of the Purchaser.
‫ روش ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ‬3-6-15
.‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎر را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪي و اﻧﺪازه ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
Soldered connections shall not be used for internal
wiring.
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
15.6.4 Quality control procedures for the proposed
wiring technique shall be submitted to the
Purchaser for approval.
‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ روشﻫﺎي‬4-6-15
15.6.5 A set of crimping/wrapping tools together
with a quantity of the required wire and crimp pins
etc. shall be supplied with the cabinet(s), to
facilitate any modifications that may be necessary
during commissioning.
‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮي از اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‬5-6-15
.‫ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻛﻪ در‬،‫ ﻣﻘﺪاري ﺳﻴﻢ ﻻزم و ﭘﻴﻦﻫﺎي ﭘﺮﺳﻲ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬7-15
15.7 Earthing
15.7.1 A safety-earth connection shall be provided
for every cabinet. Conducting parts such as doors
and frames, etc., which are not permanently
connected to safety-earth, shall be connected to the
cabinet frame with flexible braided earthing strips
of 6 mm2 minimum size.
.‫ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬1-7-15
15.7.2 Safety-earthing shall be connected to a
dedicated earth-bolt of M8 minimum size,
provided with an earth symbol marker.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﭘﻴﭻ اﺗﺼﺎل‬2-7-15
15.7.3 Where local regulations are more stringent
‫ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺮرات ﻣﺤﻠﻲ از اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺎﻻ‬3-7-15
،‫ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎي ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻣﺜﻞ دربﻫﺎ و ﭼﻬﺎرﭼﻮبﻫﺎ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻄﻮر داﺋﻢ وﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪهاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮار ﺳﻴﻤﻲ اﻧﻌﻄﺎفﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪازه‬
.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬6 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه وﺻﻞ‬M8 ‫زﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
29
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
than the above requirements, this shall be indicated
in the requisition and they shall be complied with.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻗﻮيﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
15.7.4 Each cabinet shall have a tinned copper
earth-bar for signal earth connections and
sufficient screws shall be available for making the
connections. The signal earth-bar shall be insulated
from the cabinet frame. Earth connections shall be
as short as possible and of adequate cross sectional
area.
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻣﻴﻠﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻲ روي‬4-7-15
‫اﻧﺪود ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎﻻت زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل‬.‫ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ آﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه و ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
.‫آن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺟﺮﻗﻪ زدن ﺑﻴﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬5-7-15
15.7.5 To avoid flash-over between signal earth
and safety earth, over-voltage protection devices
should be applied, limiting the voltage difference
to 65 volts approximately.
‫ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل و اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ وﻟﺖ‬65 ‫ ﻛﻪ اﺧﺘﻼف وﻟﺘﺎژ را ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﻪ‬،‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ‬6-7-15
15.7.6 For additional lightning protection
requirements, see the standard of "Transmission
Systems", IPS-E-IN-190.
.‫ "ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل" ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬IPS-E-IN-190 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
If the equipment installed in the cabinet requires
the connection of signal-earth to the cabinet frame
because it is the manufacturer’s standard, then the
cabinet shall be mounted such that it is insulated
from safety earth and the building structure.
‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ وﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮدن اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎرﭼﻮب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ از زﻣﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻦ و‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﺎزه ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
15.7.7 Earthing details of cabinets shall be shown
on separate drawings as part of the complete set of
drawings for earthing details.
‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي‬7-7-15
‫ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
.‫داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
System manufacturer requirement shall be adhered
to.
‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬8-15
15.8 Instrument Electrical Supply
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-8-15
15.8.1 General requirements
15.8.1.1 The system shall be suitable for operating
from a supply as defined in Appendix A. The
selection shall be indicated in the requisition.
Without considering redundancy, a spare capacity
of 25% of the maximum allowable load shall be
available.
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬1-1-8-15
15.8.1.2 The power sources shall be of a design to
suit the requirements of the system. The
manufacturer shall ensure that the power sources
do not introduce interference into the system.
‫ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬2-1-8-15
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬.‫آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )اﻟﻒ( آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺪون در ﻧﻈﺮ‬.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺟﻬﺖ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬25 ،‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ اﻓﺰوﻧﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
‫( دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪاز ﻧﻮع ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﺎده ﺑﻮده ﻛﻪ‬1
1) Power supply units shall be of the simplest
design to fulfil the requirements of the system.
.‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﺑﺮآورده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
30
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
2) Inrush currents and short circuit currents shall
be limited, to avoid damage to the power supply
units.
‫( ﺟﺮﻳﺎنﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺠﻮﻣﻲ و ﺟﺮﻳﺎنﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺟﻬﺖ‬2
15.8.1.3 A fuse/circuit breaker schematic diagram
shall be prepared for each system cabinet, together
with calculations indicating power distribution,
fuse ratings, fuse types (size and current-time
characteristics), terminations and total worst-case
power consumption.
‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻓﻴﻮز ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي‬3-1-8-15
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ زدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد ﺑﻪﻃﻮريﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت‬
‫ اﻧﻮاع ﻓﻴﻮز )اﻧﺪازه و‬،‫ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮز‬،‫ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﺮق‬
‫ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ و ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻞ‬،(‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺟﺮﻳﺎن و زﻣﺎن‬
.‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
The information shall be available at an early stage
of the project and be updated regularly, to enable
electrical engineering department to selectively
size the fuses in their supplies.
ً‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﭘﺮوژه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ روز رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮق ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
.‫اﻧﺪازه ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
15.8.1.4 The data sheet shall indicate if the supply
for the circuitry in the cabinet will be floating or
earthed on one side.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪار ﺑﻨﺪي در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺪون‬4-1-8-15
‫اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ در ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮف ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬
.‫داده ﺑﺮگ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
1) The earth systems, have common zero and
earthing on one side. The written approval of the
user shall be obtained in these cases.
‫ داراي ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك و در ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮف‬،‫( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬1
2) Floating supplies are applied in order to obtain a
high integrity of the system and to enable an early
detection of a fault or start of a fault by means of
earth leakage detection.
‫( ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﻨﺎور در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﻜﭙﺎرﭼﮕﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ و ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ آﺷﻜﺎر‬2
3) Special attention shall be paid to all inputs and
outputs to and from cabinets with a floating
supply, and to interconnections with other systems
in order to ensure that the earth-fault detection can
function properly, i.e., circuits fed from supply
with earth-leakage detection shall be completely
separated from those fed by some other supply by
means of potential-free contacts or by galvanic
isolation circuits.
‫( ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺬول داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻠﻴﻪ وروديﻫﺎ‬3
‫در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬.‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺳﺎزي زود ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎز‬
.‫ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻲ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
‫و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﻨﺎور و اﺗﺼﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد درﺳﺖ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎزي ﺧﻄﺎي زﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪه‬،‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎز ﻧﺸﺘﻲ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً از‬
‫ﻣﺪارﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎي ﺑﺪون ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﮔﺎﻟﻮاﻧﻴﻚ‬
.‫ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
15.8.1.5 Earth leakage monitoring shall be
provided in the electrical distribution board, i.e.,
for the floating DC supply system, and should
form part of the system cabinet power supply
arrangement.
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬5-1-8-15
15.8.1.6 Potential free contacts shall be available
for alarm on the operator’s panel / work station,
for earth leakage detection system.
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎي ﺑﺪون ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺸﺪار روي‬6-1-8-15
‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺷﻨﺎور‬.‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮق ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬،‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎزي ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬،‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم داﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺪون وﻗﻔﻪ‬7-1-8-15
15.8.1.7 If the intention is to provide an
uninterruptible power supply, maintenance of the
supply or supply units in the system cabinets, shall
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
31
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
be possible without disturbing the supply.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
‫( ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻻزم در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬1
1) Details of the required power supply
arrangement given in the requisition, shall also
indicate the amount of redundancy and the
maintenance facilities required, such as indications
for overvoltage, under voltage, overload and
isolation of incoming power.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻓﺰوﻧﮕﻲ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮاﺗﻲ‬،‫داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎر‬،‫ اﻓﺖ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬،‫ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه اﺿﺎﻓﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬،‫ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫و ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﻗﺪرت ورودي‬
2) With built-in power supply units, due attention
shall be given to the wiring and terminations, with
respect to on-line servicing possibilities.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ و‬،‫( در ﻣﻨﺒﻊﻫﺎي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬2
‫ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺎت روي ﺧﻂ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
.‫ﻣﺒﺬول داﺷﺖ‬
3) Power supply units should be located in the top
of the cabinet to avoid unnecessary heating of the
cabinet internals.
‫ در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن‬،‫( دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬3
.‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري داﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺑﺎﻻي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
4) The supply arrangement inside the cabinet
should include protection against polarity reversal.
‫( ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ در داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در‬4
15.8.1.8 Power supply terminations shall be clearly
identified and numbered and wiring shall be kept
separate from interference susceptible wiring.
‫ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬8-1-8-15
15.8.1.9 Power supply group numbers and
distribution board numbers shall be clearly
identified inside the system cabinets.
‫ ﺷﻤﺎرهﻫﺎي ﮔﺮوه ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ و ﺷﻤﺎرهﻫﺎي‬9-1-8-15
.‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ از ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬
.‫ ﺟﺪا ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در داﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬2-8-15
15.8.2 Batteries inside cabinets
‫ اﺟﺎزه ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ را‬،‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه و اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬.‫ﻻزم دارد‬
:‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ زﻳﺮ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ‬،‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎي آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‬
‫ درﺟﻪ‬30 ‫ دﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ‬،‫ در ﺟﻬﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ از ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬.‫ﺳﻴﻠﺴﻴﻮس ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ روي ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮاﺗﻲ‬،‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﺳﻨﺎد‬.‫ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ و ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ در ﻣﺪت راهاﻧﺪازي در ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ‬‫ در‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
‫ درﺻﺪ اﻧﺪازه‬80 ‫ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The application of batteries inside cabinets requires
the written approval of the user. All such batteries
shall be clearly identified and the following
minimum requirements shall be adhered to:
- Sealed batteries shall be applied, otherwise
agreed in writing by the user.
- The temperature shall be kept below 30°C for
efficient use of the battery.
- Facilities for on-line replacement and
checking shall be provided.
-Full documentation, such as maintenance
instructions, area classification and expected
lifetime shall be supplied.
- The batteries shall be tested for capacity
during commissioning on site according to the
battery manufacturers instructions. If the
capacity is less than 80% of the rating they
shall be replaced.
- Small, low cost batteries for memory
protection etc. shall be renewed without testing.
‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ و ارزان‬،‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬.‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪون آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮيﻫﺎ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر واﺿﺢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬-
- All batteries in the cabinet shall be clearly
identified, e.g. on the inside of the door stating
32
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
type, function, date fitted, date checked, date of
renewal, etc.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
،‫ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬،‫ ﻧﻮع‬،‫ در داﺧﻞ درب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬،‫ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬،‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ‬9-15
15.9 Identification
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﻳﻚ ﭘﻼك ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ از ﺟﻨﺲ‬1-9-15
15.9.1 Each cabinet shall have a nameplate of
corrosion resistant material fixed on to the front of
the cabinet, with screws, and giving the following
information:
‫ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬،‫ﺿﺪ زﻧﮓ ﺑﻮده در ﺟﻠﻮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫ ﻧﺎم ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬،‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬،‫ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ وات‬،‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ و ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬،‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬.‫ ﺳﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬-
- Name of purchaser,
- Serial number of the unit,
- Rating in watt,
- Voltage and frequency,
- Purchase order number,
- Year of manufacture.
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﺑﺮقدار ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪيﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬2-9-15
15.9.2 Live parts of equipment and terminations
carrying voltages above 50 volt shall be covered
with a transparent insulation plate, bearing the
warning text: DANGER.
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬،‫ وﻟﺖ دارﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﻔﺎف‬50 ‫ﺑﺎﻻي‬
.‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫"ﺧﻄﺮ" روي آن ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ‬،‫ ﺳﻮﻛﺖﻫﺎ‬،‫ رﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬3-9-15
15.9.3 All equipment, relays, sockets, wiring,
terminals, etc. shall be clearly identified by
nameplate in accordance with the relevant
drawings included in the data sheet.
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ و ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ در داده ﺑﺮگ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
15.9.4 These nameplates shall be properly fixed
using a 2 component epoxy resin cement near to
the equipment on non-removable parts of the
cabinet.
‫ اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دو ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺳﻴﻤﺎن‬4-9-15
15.9.5 Nameplates shall be prepared in accordance
with the requirements of nameplates standard.
‫ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ و ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬5-9-15
‫و رزﻳﻦ اﭘﻮﻛﺴﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬
.‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﭘﻼكﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬-16
16. ERGONOMIC DESIGN
CONSIDERATION
16.1 Shared Visual Displays, Off-Work Station
‫ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬1-16
The requirements presented in this clause concern
the location of shared visual displays within the
control room. Many differing technologies can be
used for overview visual displays, including banks
of closed circuit television (CCTV) monitors,
hard-wired mimics and static maps/diagrams.
When designing control room layouts for these
differing solutions, the constraints imposed by the
various solutions will need to be considered. Such
constraints include limitations on viewing angle,
contrast ratios and image construction. As an
alternative to large shared displays, the option of
presenting this information on the control
‫اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻓﻦآوريﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮك در ﻣﺤﺪوده اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻲﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ دﻳﺎﮔﺮاﻣﻬﺎ و‬،(CCTV) ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺪار ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ )ﻣﻴﻤﻴﻚ( و ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎزي ﺷﺪه ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ در زﻣﺎن ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺮاي راه ﺣﻠﻬﺎي‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎي وﺿﻮح و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ زاوﻳﻪ دﻳﺪ‬
،‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺰرگ‬
‫اراﺋﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت در روي اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ‬
33
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
workstation, with smaller schematics, should be
considered.
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ دﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ و ﻋﻤﻮدي‬2-16
16.2 Horizontal and Vertical Viewing Distances
In particular, the following has to be taken into
account.
.‫ﻣﻮارد ذﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ وﻳﮋه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
16.2.1 Where off-workstation visual displays need
to be used on a regular or continuous basis, the
preferred position is directly in front of the control
room operator such that they can easily be seen
when looking over the control workstation or can
be scanned by eye-movement alone (see Figure 1).
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي‬1-2-16
،‫ﻛﺎري ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺪاوم ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ و ارﺟﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺗﺎق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻮده ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي ﻛﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ از‬
‫اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻗﺎﺑﻞ روﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﺎن‬
(.‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬1 ‫ )ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬-1
1. Operator
‫ ﻣﻴﺪان دﻳﺪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬-2
2. Horizontal visual field
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري‬-3
3. Off-workstation visual display
.‫ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن دادن اﺻﻮل ﻛﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note: This plan view is intended to show general
principles.
Fig. 1- PREFERRED LOCATION OF OFF-WORKSTATION VISUAL DISPLAYS
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﺎري‬-1 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
Note: For more information on Ergonomic
Consideration, see IPS-G-IN-220.
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬IPS-G-IN-220 ‫ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ارﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬-17
17. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
‫ دوره روﺷﻦ‬1-17
17.1 Burn-in Period
‫ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در داده ﺑﺮگ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1-1-17
17.1.1 When specified in the data sheet each
system cabinet containing active elements, shall be
completely assembled and subjected to a 100 hours
burn-in period at elevated temperature and with all
loads energized.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﺎنﻫﺎي ﻓﻌﺎل‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ دوره روﺷﻦ در دﻣﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻲ و‬100 ‫ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
.‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻓﻌﺎل را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
34
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
17.1.2 After the burn-in period the system shall
comply with the performance requirements and
successfully pass the other tests indicated in this
section.
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ‬،‫ ﭘﺲ از دوره روﺷﻦ‬2-1-17
17.1.3 Detailed procedures for the burn-in period
and the other tests indicated in this section, shall
be submitted to the user together with the proposed
dates for the tests, in order that they may be
witnessed by the Purchaser.
‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي دوره روﺷﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬3-1-17
17.1.4 A record shall be prepared during burn-in
and testing, indicating failures and replacements or
repairs of any components, the record shall include
data such as temperature and humidity etc., with
reference to the applicable environmental
specification. This record shall be regularly
updated and be available for review by the
purchaser or his representative, at any time during
the tests.
‫ دوره روﺷﻦ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ و‬4-1-17
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ را‬
.‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦﻫﺎي‬،‫آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬،‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫اﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻧﺎﻇﺮ آن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت در آن ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﺜﻞ دﻣﺎ و رﻃﻮﺑﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬،‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ دادهﻫﺎ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﺑﻪ روز رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪه و‬.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ در ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ آﻣﺎده‬،‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪه او‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد‬2-17
17.2 Reliability
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬1-2-17
17.2.1 When specified in the requisition, the
reliability
shall
be
stated
by
the
manufacturer/supplier for the system cabinet
which he will supply. The figures to be provided
should be; mean time between failure (MTBF) for
both nuisance and serious failure with an assumed
mean time to repair (MTTR) of 8 hours.
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬،‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ارﻗﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ‬MTBF) ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺪل زﻣﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲﻫﺎ‬
(MTTR) ‫ﺟﺪي و اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺪل زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬8
17.2.2 To determine the definition of failure for
the system to be supplied, advice shall be obtained
from the purchaser’s specialist.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ داده ﺷﺪه‬2-2-17
17.2.3 Data and calculations shall be provided to
substantiate the figures quoted for the system
cabinet.
‫ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت و دادهﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ارﻗﺎم ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي‬3-2-17
.‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎت ﻛﺎرﺷﻨﺎس ﺧﺮﻳﺪار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ اﺛﺒﺎت ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
Typically, the reliability should be determined in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 60605,
and a detailed test specification should be prepared
by the manufacturer or an independent third party.
IEC 60605 ‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬
17.2.4 The test specification and the independent
third party to be involved in the testing shall be
subject to the approval of the Purchaser.
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت آزﻣﻮن و ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ درﮔﻴﺮ در‬4-2-17
17.2.5 Unless otherwise specified by the
Purchaser, the failure reporting shall be in
accordance with the IEC publications referred to
above.
‫ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه در‬IEC ‫ ﮔﺰارش ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ اﻧﺘﺸﺎرات‬5-2-17
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﻳﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫اﻧﺠﺎم آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي دﻳﮕﺮي ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
35
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
17.3 Type Test
‫ آزﻣﻮن ﻧﻮﻋﻲ‬3-17
17.3.1 General
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-3-17
‫در ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ از ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه در زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ‬،‫ ﺑﻬﺮﺣﺎل‬.‫ﮔﺬراﻧﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ و ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار اﻏﻤﺎض ﮔﺮدد‬
To ensure that the design of the system cabinet
complies with the requirements intended by the
Purchaser, at least one system cabinet of each
design should be subjected to, and successfully
pass the type tests defined below. However, some
of the tests indicated in this section may be waived
with the written agreement of the Purchaser.
‫ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ در ﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﺎر‬2-3-17
17.3.2 Bench tests
‫ ﻃﻮل ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و‬،‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺪارﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ را اراﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
The supplier shall indicate in the quotation, to
which severity the equipment and the circuitry
may be tested.
‫ رد ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬1-2-3-17
17.3.2.1 Interference rejection
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ راه اﻧﺪاز ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ رواداريﻫﺎي)ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬،‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮي‬‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬،(‫ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ب‬2 ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺪار ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫( در‬rms) ‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ وﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬
30 ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬،‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
.‫ ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ ﺷﻮد‬،‫اﻫﻢ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك‬100 ‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬،(‫ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )ب‬3 ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪار راه‬rms) ‫وﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬
.‫اﻧﺪاز ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ ﺷﻮد‬
The system shall respond within the specified
tolerances, when using the initiating devices as
specified to carry out the following tests:
- Series Mode
Using the circuit of Fig. 2 of Appendix B,
an interfering signal of 1 Volt AC (rms) at
mains frequency, shall be applied from a
source with an output resistance of 30
ohms.
- Common Mode
With reference to Fig. 3 of Appendix B, a
signal of 100 Volt AC (rms), shall be
applied to the initiating circuit with respect
to the earth.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ وﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﮔﺮدد‬
Where applicable, other voltage values may be
proposed by the supplier.
‫ رواداريﻫﺎي)ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ ﻫﺎي( ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق‬2-2-3-17
17.3.2.2 Electrical supply tolerances
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق در ﻣﺤﺪوده رواداريﻫﺎي)ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ﻫﺎي( ﻣﺠﺎز و ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ رواداريﻫﺎي)ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ ﻫﺎي( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ )اﻟﻒ( ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
The system shall function, within the specified
tolerances, when the electrical supply is varied
within the allowed tolerances for the selected type
of supply, see Appendix A.
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﺎي ﮔﺬراي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق‬3-2-3-17
17.3.2.3 Electrical supply transients
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻟﺲﻫﺎي زﻳﺮﻳﻦ روي وﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ در ﻣﺪت‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ رواداريﻫﺎي‬،‫زﻣﺎن اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫)ﺗﻠﺮاﻧﺲ ﻫﺎي( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
The system shall function, within the specified
tolerances, when the following pulses are
superimposed on the supply voltage for the
durations indicated:
36
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
OVER VOLTAGE OF NOMINAL (%)
PULSE DURATION IN (ms)
‫اﺿﺎﻓﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﻪ درﺻﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
100
200
300
500
10
1
0.02
0.005
‫ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎي رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬4-2-3-17
17.3.2.4 Radio-frequency interference (Refer to
IEC 61000-3)
(‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬IEC 61000-3 ‫)ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ درﻣﻌﺮض آزﻣﻮن ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ درﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎي رادﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ در‬،‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ دربﻫﺎي ﺑﺎز و ﻛﺎرت ﻣﺪار‬،‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮي از ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺪت ﻣﻴﺪان‬.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ وﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ‬5 ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﺪه در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از‬
.‫ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
The system shall be subjected to an interference
test at radio frequencies, by operating a portable
transmitter/receiver at a distance of one meter from
the cabinet, with the doors open and the
maintenance extender circuit card(s) installed. The
electric field strength measured at the cabinet shall
not exceed 5 V/m.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
‫ ﺷﺪت ﻣﻴﺪان‬،‫( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي‬1
1) As an alternative to measuring, the electric field
strength may be calculated using the following
formula:
:‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﻮل زﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
E = (1.6√ P)/d
E = (1.6√ P)/d
:‫ﻛﻪ‬
Where:
E
is the electric field strength in v/m;
‫ ﺷﺪت ﻣﻴﺪان اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ وﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ؛‬- E
P
is the rated power of the portable
transmitter/receiver in watts, and
‫ ﻗﺪرت ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ‬- P
is the distance between
transmitter/receiver
and
cabinet in metres.
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه و ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺮ‬- d
d
‫ﺣﺴﺐ وات‬
the
the
.‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬
.‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The portable transmitter/receiver shall be fully
charged and the condition shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specification.
‫ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬A-4 ‫( ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬2
2) The distance shall never be less than that
indicated in Fig. A-4 of IEC 60801-3 for far fields.
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬IEC 60801-3
‫ ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬460 ،‫ ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬170-70 ‫آزﻣﻮن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ در ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن آزﻣﻮن‬.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
0/5 ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ داده و ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎلﻫﺎي آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
.‫درﺻﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮه ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪهﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻧﺤﺮاف از‬.‫در ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ آزﻣﻮن ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎً ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺖ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The test shall be carried out at frequencies of 70170 MHz, 460 MHz. During the test, digital signals
shall not change status, and analogue signals shall
not change by more than 0.5% of the span.
The requisition shall indicate the frequency of any
portable transmitters used at the destination site. This
frequency shall be specifically checked during the
test. Any deviation from the above procedure shall be
approved by the Purchaser in writing.
.‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ‬5-2-3-17
17.3.2.5 Short-circuiting of output terminals.
.‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎي ورودي‬6-2-3-17
17.3.2.6 Earthing of input terminals.
37
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
The supplier shall indicate, in his quotation, if
these tests are possible with the equipment to be
supplied.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﻦ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ‬،‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺧﻮد‬
.‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬، ‫را ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬
‫ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ و آب و ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ‬3-3-17
17.3.3 Climatic and environmental tests
‫ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬1-3-3-17
17.3.3.1 General
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام از آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬،‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ در ﻣﺪت‬،‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از آزﻣﻮن‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫آزﻣﻮن و ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻫﺮ آزﻣﻮن اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮل‬2 ‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﺪول‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه و در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
When carrying out any of the following tests, the
cabinet shall be completely assembled, mounted
and enclosed as for the actual installation.
Functional checks shall be made before, during
and after each test.
As agreed with the Purchaser, a number of tests
shall be selected from table 2 with severities as
specified and related to the environment in which
the cabinet will operate.
TABLE 2- TESTS
‫ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ‬-2 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
REFERENCE TEST METHOD
TESTS
‫آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ‬
Dry heat
Cold
Damp heat
Vibration
Impact
Corrosion SO2
Corrosion H2O
‫روش آزﻣﻮن ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮارت ﺧﺸﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺮد‬
‫ﺣﺮارت رﻃﻮﺑﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺮزش‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﺮد‬
‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ آب‬
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-3 Part 2 Test Ca
IEC 60068-2-3 Part 2 Test Fc
As specified
IEC 60068-2-42 Part 2 Test Kc
IEC 60068-2-43 Part 2 Test Kd
18. FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING
‫ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪاي‬-18
18.1 Unless otherwise specified in the requisition,
all system cabinets and panels shall be inspected
by the user’s nominated inspector before leaving
the factory. The inspection shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of factory
inspection and testing of instruments and
instrument system standard, IPS-I-IN-100.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎزرس‬1-18
18.2 Inspection shall take place after all works has
been completed, including the factory burn-in
(see17.1) and testing by the manufacturer as
appropriate. The user shall be informed at least
ten working days in advance of when the
inspection can be made.
‫ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ از اﺗﻤﺎم ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎرﻫﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬2-18
‫ ﻣﮕﺮ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﺮك ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬.‫ﺑﻨﺤﻮ دﻳﮕﺮي در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ "ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬IPS-I-IN-100 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪاي و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ" اﻧﺠﺎم ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬
‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬1-17 ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪاي )ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ده روز ﻛﺎري‬.‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ( و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار اﻃﻼع داده ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ در آﻳﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬،‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻣﺒﺮا‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮج ﺧﻮد‬،‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را از ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ‬
.‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ د اﺷﺖ‬
If for any reason the user waives inspection, this
shall not relieve the manufacturer/supplier of the
responsibility to repair, at his cost, any defects
found later.
38
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
18.3 The manufacturer shall provide free of
charge simulation and test apparatus, together
with personnel for carrying out the tests indicated
in this specification, the data sheets and the
inspection plan.
‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ‬،‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي آزﻣﻮن و ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎزي‬3-18
18.4 If simulation and test equipment is part of
the order, this equipment shall be used during the
inspection and testing.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات آزﻣﻮن و ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎزي ﺟﺰ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از‬4-18
18.5 Any defect found by the purchaser’s
inspector shall be rectified in his presence. Where
this is not possible, check lists shall be prepared
stating all pending items for signature by the
purchaser’s inspector. Copies of these lists shall
be sent to the equipment’s destination for their
subsequent checking.
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎزرس ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺷﻮد‬5-18
18.6 The equipment shall not be shipped before
all discovered defects have been corrected and
satisfactorily retested.
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و آزﻣﺎﻳﺶﻫﺎي رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ از‬6-18
18.7 Re-testing of the related systems after
correction of the defects, shall be carried out as
indicated by the purchaser’s inspector.
‫ آزﻣﻮن دوﺑﺎره ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬7-18
18.8 The inspection outlined above is considered
only as an agreement for shipping the equipment,
it shall not be considered as a formal acceptance
of the equipment by the Purchaser.
‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ‬8-18
‫ در داده‬،‫ﻛﺎرﻛﻨﺎن ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و‬،‫ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪم اﻣﻜﺎن رﻓﻊ‬.‫در ﺣﻀﻮر اﻳﺸﺎن رﻓﻊ ﻋﻴﺐ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ از اﻗﻼم ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ اﻣﻀﺎء ﺑﺎزرس ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻋﻴﺐ‬
‫ ﻛﭙﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ارﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬.‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ﺟﻬﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶﻫﺎي ﺑﻌﺪي ارﺳﺎل ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻲﻫﺎي ﻛﺸﻒ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎزرس ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻲﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان‬.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮش رﺳﻤﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي و ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬-19
19. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION
19.1 The manufacturer/supplier shall remove all
side mounted instruments and ship them
separately from the cabinet( s) and panel.
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬1-19
19.2 Prior to packing, all open ended pipes shall
be adequately sealed to prevent ingress of dust
and moisture. All loose pipes, cable loom, etc.,
which are disconnected for ease of shipment, shall
be secured and identified.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺎز ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر‬،‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي‬2-19
‫ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻛﻨﺎر ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ را ﺟﺪا ﻧﻤﻮده و آنﻫﺎ را ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ از‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﺟﻬﺖ ورود ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك و رﻃﻮﺑﺖ آبﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻞ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ‬،‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎي آزاد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬاري و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺣﻤﻞ وﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪهاﻧﺪ‬
19.3 The manufacturer/supplier shall inspect and
approve the loading and bracing to ensure that
damage will not occur during transit.
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري و ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي را‬3-19
19.4 All sensitive meters such as millivolt and
milli amp meters shall be "jumpered" on the input
to give damping against mechanical shock.
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺣﺴﺎس ﻣﺜﻞ اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮيﻫﺎي‬4-19
19.5 Prior to packing, all cabinets should be
mounted on a suitable skid and coated with a
strip-off lacquer.
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺗﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬،‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي‬5-19
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ و اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
.‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﺧﺴﺎرت وارد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻲ وﻟﺖ و ﻣﻴﻠﻲ آﻣﭙﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ورودي آنﻫﺎ را "ﺟﺎﻣﭙﺮ" ﻧﻤﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﺎ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻮكﻫﺎي ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻨﺪن روﻛﺶ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
39
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ درﻳﺎﻳﻲ و در ﻣﻌﺮض‬6-19
19.6 If cabinets and panels are subjected to
overseas transit and exposed to storage under
adverse conditions, the following minimum
specification is given as a guide to the degree of
protection required:
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر درﺟﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬،‫ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ‬،‫ﻻزم‬
:‫اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
- The units shall be sealed in suitable plastic
envelopes, humidity indicators fitted and
sufficient desiccant for 12 months storage
enclosed.
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ آبﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه و‬‫ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪهﻫﺎي رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ و ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ در ﺟﻬﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﻮد‬12 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ ﭘﻴﭻ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي‬‫ و ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و‬،‫ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺿﺮﺑﻪﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي در اﻃﺮاف و اﻧﺘﻬﺎ و ﺳﺮﭘﻮش ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار داده‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻃﺮاف و اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬،‫ ﻛﻒ ﭼﻬﺎرﭼﻮب‬‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي ﺷﻴﺎردار و ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺿﺪ آب‬22 ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- Cabinets and panels shall be bolted to the base
of the packing case with interposed shock proof
mountings, and cushioned with an adequate
thickness of packing material on sides, ends and
the lid.
- The framed base, sides and ends of the
packing case shall be constructed of 22 mm
thick tongued and grooved close boarding and
lined with reinforced waterproof paper.
- The lid shall be lined with roofing felt backed
by 3 mm plywood.
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬3 ‫ ﺳﺮﭘﻮش ﺑﺎ ﭼﻮب ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺎل ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
19.7 The manufacturers/suppliers final packaging
specification is subject to the purchaser’s
approval.
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬7-19
19.8 The shipping mark, Purchase Order Number
and any other particulars as requested in the
requisition, shall be stenciled on each separate
package and/or on the outside of each wooden
case or crate.
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺳﻔﺎرش و ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬،‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ وﻧﻘﻞ‬8-19
.‫ﻣﻨﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺎص ﻣﻮرد درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ در ﺑﺮگ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎي ﺟﺪا و ﻳﺎ روي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي‬
.‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ وزن ﻛﻞ‬9-19
19.9 The cabinet and panel manufacturer/supplier
shall inform the Purchaser of the estimated total
weight and dimensions of each shipping section of
the cabinet and its termination rack, within four
weeks of the acknowledgment of the Purchase Order.
‫ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻨﻲ و اﺑﻌﺎد ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﻪ را در ﻋﺮض‬
.‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﻫﻔﺘﻪ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار اﻋﻼم ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬-20
20. GUARANTEE
20.1 The manufacturer/supplier shall guarantee all
works and materials in his supply against defect,
poor workmanship, improper design, improper
packaging and/or failure in normal use for 12
months after the system has been placed in service
but not exceeding 18 months after date of delivery.
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎرﻫﺎ و اﺟﻨﺎس و ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬1-20
20.2 The manufacturer/supplier shall repair or
replace within one week, without any charge to
the Purchaser, the parts found defective within the
time specified above. In no event will this
guarantee cover defects due to normal wear and
tear or due to disregard of manufacturer/supplier’s
operating instructions.
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪاي ﻛﻪ در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬2-20
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي‬،‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ ﻣﺎه ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻦ‬12 ‫ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ و ﻳﺎ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻋﺎدي در‬
‫ ﻣﺎه از زﻣﺎن‬18 ‫ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﮕﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺪون ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬،‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻻ ﺧﺮاب ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ‬.‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل و ﭘﺎره ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي‬
.‫ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
40
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
20.3 The guarantee period shall be extended by
any period(s) equal to the period(s) during which
the system has been out of operation as a result of
a defect covered by this guarantee.
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲﻫﺎي‬3-20
20.4 Fresh guarantee periods equal to those
specified above shall apply to replacement parts
or repaired parts.
‫ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ‬4-20
20.5 The manufacturer/supplier shall guarantee at
least (15) years spare parts supply.
،‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻮازم ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬5-20
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﺧﺎرج از ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺴﺎوي زﻣﺎن ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺪت ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮي ﻣﺴﺎوي زﻣﺎن اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺎﻻ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
.‫ ﺳﺎل را ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬15 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬-21
21. PURCHASING PROCEDURES
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت زﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
In addition to general purchasing conditions, the
following requirements shall also apply when
supplying system cabinets and control panels.
‫ اداﻣﻪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﺟﻨﺎس‬1-21
21.1 Extent of Supply
‫ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ‬1-1-21
21.1.1 Each system cabinet and control panel
shall be as specified in this standard, the data
sheets and the documents listed therein. In case of
a conflict between these documents, the order of
priority shall be as follows:
‫ در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ و ﻣﺪارﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬،‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
:‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬.‫ داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﺪارك اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ‬.‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬-
- The Purchase Order.
- The data sheets.
- The documents listed in the data sheets.
- This standard.
21.1.2 Each system shall be supplied with an
adequate number of special tools if applicable,
(e.g., for the mounting and/or removal of lamps or
switches).
‫ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﺎﻓﻲ از ﻟﻮازم ﻣﺨﺼﻮص در‬2-1-21
21.1.3 The cabinet or/and control panel shall be
delivered completely assembled for erection at
site, except for those parts removed for packing,
without further preparation.
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬3-1-21
(‫ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم )ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل ﻧﺼﺐ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎ و ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺠﺰ‬،‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي ﺑﺪون آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻌﺪي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮگ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد‬2-21
21.2 Quotation
‫ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﺮگ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻪ ﻓﺮم‬1-2-21
21.2.1 Quotation shall be submitted in three
forms, one with prices (commerical quotation),
the seconed without price (unpriced commerical
quotation) and the third (technical quotation).
‫)ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺗﺠﺎري( دوﻣﻲ ﺑﺪون ﻗﻴﻤﺖ )ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺗﺠﺎري ﺑﺪون‬
.‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ( و ﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻓﻨﻲ( ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﮔﺮدد‬
:‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2-2-21
21.2.2 The following information shall be
included in the quotation:
a) The price for the complete system
cabinet or/and control panel as specified
by the purchaser, together with the price
for:
‫اﻟﻒ( ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ‬
:‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺑﺮ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ؛‬-
- Witnessed testing of the system;
41
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
- Furnishing of drawings;
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ؛‬‫ ﺟﻤﻊآوري اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دادهﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻮازم ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬‫)در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد(؛‬
‫ دادن دادهﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮاﺗﻲ و ﻧﺼﺐ؛‬-
- Compilation of spare parts data (if
any);
- Furnishing of installation and
maintenance data;
- Provisions for transport, including
packaging;
‫ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬،‫ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪي؛‬
‫ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻪ‬.‫در ﺑﺮگ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺎت ﭘﺮداﺧﺘﻲ‬-
- Transport charges to the delivery
point mentioned in the enquiry;
- Turnover tax, if any.
b) A copy of the certificate of intrinsic
safety (if applicable).
.(‫ب( ﻛﭙﻲ ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ذاﺗﺎً اﻳﻤﻦ )در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‬
c) Current rating of contacts used to
energize external devices.
‫ج( ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮقدار‬
.‫ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎهﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
d) Dimensional outline drawing showing
the position of the equipment in the
cabinet or/and control panel.
‫د( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﺑﻌﺎدي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و‬
.‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ‬
e) Typical internal arrangements drawing
showing the position of the equipment in
each cabinet control or/and panel.
‫ﻫ( ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن داﺧﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
f) Other details as requested in this
standard and the data sheets.
‫و( ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت دﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و داده ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ‬
g) Items on which the equipment offered
deviates
from
the
purchaser’s
specifications.
‫ز( اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي از ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
h) A statement that the equipment offered
satisfies the type tests specified in
(clause18.4) and/or detailed listings of
items which do not comply with the
specified performance criteria.
‫ح( ﻧﺎﻣﻪاي در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮدن آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎي ﻧﻮﻋﻲ‬
i) A proposal for erection/commissioning
assistance (hourly rate plus expenses).
‫ط( ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻤﻚ در ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ راهاﻧﺪازي‬
j) Proposal for site modifications (hourly
rate plus expenses).
‫ي( ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در ﻣﺤﻞ )ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ‬
k) A provisional time schedule for
meeting the delivery date indicated in the
data sheets detailing activities such as
preparation of drawings, requisitioning of
material, start of fabrication, ready for
inspection and ready for shipping.
‫ك( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪي ﺟﻬﺖ زﻣﺎن ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻪ در داده‬
.‫در ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار اﻧﺤﺮاف دارد‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي را‬4-18 ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ و ﻳﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
.‫روش اﺟﺮاﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه را ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮد‬
.(‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﻣﺨﺎرج‬
.(‫ﺑﻌﻼوه ﻣﺨﺎرج‬
‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮگﻫﺎ داده ﺷﺪه‬
،‫ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮدن اﺟﻨﺎس‬،‫آﻣﺎدهﺳﺎزي ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ‬
.‫ آﻣﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺣﻤﻞ وﻧﻘﻞ‬،‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺗﺠﺎري ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬،(‫( و )ك‬،‫ ط‬،‫ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي )اﻟﻒ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
Items a, i, and k are applicable for commercial
quotation only.
42
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﺪارك‬3-21
21.3 Documentation
21.3.1 In the event of an order being placed, the
number of copies and electronic files of the
preliminary documents and drawings to be sent
for approval and the final as built document and
drawings to be supplied, will be specified in the
purchase order.
‫ ﺗﻌﺪادي ﻛﭙﻲ و ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬1-3-21
21.3.2 At least 1 set of electronic files of drawings
shall be available at the site when the cabinet
or/and control panel arrives.
،‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮي از ﻓﺎﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ از ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ‬2-3-21
21.3.3 The documents and drawings which shall
be prepared includes but is not restricted to the
following:
‫ ﻣﺪارك و ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮدد ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻗﻼم‬3-3-21
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ از اﺳﻨﺎد اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار‬
‫ارﺳﺎل و ﺑﻪ روز رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺪارك و ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ در ﺑﺮگ‬
.‫ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﺳﻴﺪن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر آﻣﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫زﻳﺮ و ﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﻪ آنﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- Outline drawing showing dimensions in
(mm) and mass of cabinets, or/and control
panels.
Installation
instructions.
and
‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺤﻲ اﺑﻌﺎدي ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺟﺮم‬.‫ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬
.‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬-
maintenance
- Description of operation.
.‫ ﺷﺮح ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري‬.‫ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ ﺑﺮقدار ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬-
- Electricity consumption with all loads
energized.
‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ اﺗﺼﺎل و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬.‫ﻛﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
.‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎلﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﺷﺮح دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ آزﻣﻮنﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬.‫ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻗﺪرت ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ و ﻳﺎ اﻧﻮاع آن‬‫ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ‬-
- Schematic wiring and cable connection
diagrams of the complete system.
- Terminal arrangements.
- Description of test procedures.
- Earthing arrangement.
- Power distribution
ratings/types.
with
fuse
- Internal wiring diagrams or lists.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
،‫در ﺟﻬﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي و اﺟﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات آﻳﻨﺪه ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮر وﺿﻮح در ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان از آن ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻗﻼم ﺧﺮﻳﺪاري ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬.‫ اراﺋﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬
In order to be able to prepare and execute future
modifications efficiently, internal wiring shall be
clearly identified on drawings or schedules such that
the routing of every wire can be derived from it.
- Detailed information on all items bought
out by the Manufacturer.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
The System Cabinet and control panel supplier is
responsible for the supply of drawings and
documents of free issue equipment fitted by him
in the cabinet or/and control panel in the
quantities stated in the Purchase Order.
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ و ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ اراﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ و ﻣﺪارك ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺪون ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ آن در‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻌﺪاد آنﻫﺎ در ﺑﺮگ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
21.3.4 Format, layout and contents of all
documents and drawings shall be approved by the
‫ ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﺋﻲ و ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺪارك و ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬4-3-21
43
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
Purchaser at an early stage in the project.
Standard forms and examples of typical forms
will be supplied to the manufacturer with the
requisition as appropriate.
‫ ﻓﺮمﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اوﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭘﺮوژه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﻣﺜﺎلﻫﺎي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺮمﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮگ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎي ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
21.3.5 SPIR (Spare Parts Interchangeability
Record)
shall
be
completed
for
the
precommissioning/commissioning and normal
operation of the cabinet, for all cabinet, and panel
mounted components including bought-out items,
within six weeks after receipt of the Purchase
Order. This should ensure the timely purchase and
shipment of spare parts.
‫( ﺟﻬﺖ‬SPIR) ‫ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﺬﻳﺮي ﻟﻮازم ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬5-3-21
21.3.6 The Manufacturer/Supplier shall clearly
mark the spare parts interchangeability lists with
the Purchaser Order reference and item number,
unit type indication and serial number.
‫ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﺬﻳﺮي‬6-3-21
21.3.7 Spare parts list shall show for each part:
‫ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح‬7-3-21
،‫ﭘﻴﺶ راهاﻧﺪازي ﻳﺎ راهاﻧﺪازي و ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻧﺼﺐ در ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻗﻼم‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫ در ﻣﺪت ﺷﺶ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻔﺎرش‬،‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪاري ﺷﺪه‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﻬﺖ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
.‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻮازم ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ را ﺑﻄﻮر واﺿﺢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ و ﺷﻤﺎره‬
.‫ ﻧﻮع ﻗﻄﻌﻪ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل آنﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬاري ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
:‫زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺷﺮح؛‬‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ؛‬‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ؛‬-
- Description;
- Drawing/part number;
- Identification number;
- Interchangeability of the parts;
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﺬﻳﺮي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت؛‬‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد در ﻫﺮ واﺣﺪ؛‬‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ؛‬‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺟﻨﺲ؛‬‫ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ واﺣﺪ ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ؛‬.‫ ﻫﺮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻔﻴﺪ دﻳﮕﺮ‬-
- Quantity per unit;
- Total quantity;
- Material specification;
- Unit price ex-works;
- Any other useful information.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
.‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ داده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‬
Illustrated spare parts lists are preferred.
‫ ﻋﻼوه‬،‫ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬،"‫ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ "اﻗﻼم ﺧﺮﻳﺪاري‬8-3-21
21.3.8 In the case of "bought-out items" the
Supplier shall, in addition, specify:
:‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﻻ‬
.‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ و ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اﺻﻠﻲ‬-
- The drawing and part number of the
original manufacturer.
- Where two or more parts can be
supplied only as an ’assembly’ the
drawing/part number shall be given for
the assembly.
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ دو ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ را ﻣﻲﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬‫ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬،‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ داد‬
.‫داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎي‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎرهﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻮده و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
.‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
- Spare parts lists shall illustrate the
various parts with identification numbers
and should include sectional drawings/
parts list.
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ راهاﻧﺪازي ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ اﻃﻼق‬9-3-21
21.3.9 Precommissioning/commissioning spare
parts shall mean the parts required to safeguard
44
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
the operation of equipment during the running-in
and starting-in periods.These parts shall therefore
be available on site prior to plant start-up.
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻤﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
،‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر و در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﺎر رود‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ راهاﻧﺪازي در ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
.‫آﻣﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬10-3-21
21.3.10 Normal operational spare parts
Spare parts for normal operation should
adequately cover the requirements of day to day
maintenance for a period of two years operation
following the commissioning (running-in and
starting up periods).
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت روز ﺑﻪ روز‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﺮاي دوره دو ﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻬﺮهﺑﺮداري ﭘﺲ از ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫راهاﻧﺪازي )دوره در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر و ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر( را ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دﻫﺪ‬
21.3.11 The English language shall be used on all
documents.
.‫ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ در ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺪارك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬11-3-21
21.3.12 Each document shall contain the purchase
order number, item number, and year of
manufacture.
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬،‫ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺪرك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬12-3-21
.‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ و ﺳﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎنﺑﻨﺪي‬4-21
21.4 Time Schedule
،‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه‬2-2-21 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎنﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‬،‫و زﻣﺎن ﺷﺮوع ﻛﺎر‬
The provisional time schedule as per claue 21.2.2.
shall be finalized and dates for start of work,
inspection and delivery shall be indicated.
45
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
APPENDICES
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎ‬
APPENDIX A
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ اﻟﻒ‬
A.1
ELECTRICALSUPPLY
CONDITIONS
FOR
INSTRUMENT
SYSTEMS
‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي‬1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
1
2
٥
٦
3
4
٧
‫اﺑﺰاردﻗﻴﻖ‬
:‫اﻧﻮاع ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
٨
The following types of supply are defined:
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺪون وﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬1-1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.1.1 AC uninterruptible maintained
An uninterruptible two feeder AC supply of a
quality is suitable for the feeding of
microprocessor based and computer systems.
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺪون وﻗﻔﻪ دو ﻓﻴﺪر ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﭘﺮوﺳﺴﻮرﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
A.1.2 This supply will be maintained typically for
30 minutes for process units and one hour for
utilities unless otherwise specified. This type of
supply should be applied for systems such as fire
and gas detection, control and telecommunication,
with back-up times as specified.
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ واﺣﺪﻫﺎي‬30 ‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮق ﺟﻬﺖ زﻣﺎن‬2-1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي ﻻزم اﺳﺖ و ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲﻫﺎي آب و ﺑﺮق و‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع از ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺨﺎر ﻣﮕﺮ آﻧﻜﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ آﺷﻜﺎرﺳﺎزﻫﺎي آﺗﺶ و ﮔﺎز‬
.‫ ﺑﺎ زﻣﺎن ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت‬
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬3-1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.1.3 AC interruptible maintained
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن دو ﻓﻴﺪر ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق اﺿﻄﺮاري ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬10 ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﺗﺎ‬
An AC supply with a two feeder arrangement
backed up with an emergency supply, which may
have an interrupt time of up to 10 seconds.
:‫ﻳﺎدآوري‬
Note:
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬.‫ ﻣﮕﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻂ و ﺗﺮاﻧﺴﻔﻮرﻣﺎﺗﻮرﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻛﻪ وﻟﺘﺎژ را ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﻮده و ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﺑﺮق اﺻﻠﻲ را‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ‬
Unless additional measures are taken, the
electrical characteristics of this supply are the
same as for the mains supply. Additional
measures could involve line conditioners and
special transformers to stabilize voltage and
reduce mains interference.
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪه‬4-1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A.1.4 AC interruptible not maintained
‫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ و از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮق اﺿﻄﺮاري ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬3-1-‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ اﻟﻒ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺮدد‬
Same as A.1.3, but without back-up, from an
emergency power source.
A.1.5 DC uninterruptible maintained
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺪون وﻗﻔﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬5-1-‫اﻟﻒ‬
A supply as specified in electrical power supply
and distribution system standard IPS-E-IN-180,
and maintained for a prolonged period such as for
A.1.1 above.
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬IPS-E-IN-180 ‫ﻛﻪ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1-1-‫ﺟﻬﺖ زﻣﺎن ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻟﻒ‬
9
46
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
A.2 SPECIFICATION FOR THE TYPES OF
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
12
IPS-M-IN-220(1)
‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﺮاي اﻧﻮاع ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق‬2-‫اﻟﻒ‬
TABLE 1 - TYPES OF SUPPLY
‫ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬-1 ‫ﺟﺪول‬
11
DESCRIPTION
Voltage (Note )
Voltage Tolerance (+% max.)
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency Tolerance (+%max.)
Harmonic (%max.)
Content (Note 4)
Ripple (%max.) (Note 3)
Interrupt Time
Crest Factor (max.) (Note 4)
In-Rush Current (Note 5)
(1.1)*
(1.3)*
(1.4)*
(1.5)*
110
5
50
2
5 Total
2 Each
--10 ms
3
110
5 (Note 2)
50
5
---
110
5 (Note 2)
50
5
24
--10 s
-----
10
------2
10 ms
* See the previous page
.‫* ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﻳﺎدآوريﻫﺎ‬
Notes:
1) Voltage and frequency to suit local conditions,
will be confirmed together with phase required,
for each particular case (by Electrical
Engineering).
‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎز ﻻزم‬،‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ و ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬-1
2) As mains supply (statistical information, if
required, shall be provided by Electrical
Engineering).
‫ در ﺻﻮرت‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ )اﻃﻼﻋﺎت آﻣﺎري‬-2
3) Defined as root means square value of AC
components/nominal DC voltage.
‫( ﺑﺮق ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب ﻳﺎ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮق‬rms) ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬-3
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮق ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
.(‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺮق ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﻟﺰوم‬
.‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
4) Defined as l(peak)/l(root mean square).
Additional harmonics may be generated by the
non-linear load, total should not exceed 5% and
2% for each component.
.‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﭘﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬-4
،‫ﻫﺎرﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚﻫﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬2 ‫ درﺻﺪ و در ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ از‬5 ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼً از‬
.‫ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
5) Defined as number of times the nominal
current will be drawn during a defined time.
. ‫ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه در زﻣﺎن ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬-5
Typical figure could be:
:‫ﻋﺪد ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﺪد ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬10 ‫ در ﻣﺪت‬،(‫ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن )ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬20
.‫ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
20 × I (nominal), during 10 ms. The figure is to
be confirmed for each particular case.
47
Apri. 2010 / 1389 ‫اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ‬
48
IPS-M-IN-220(1)